all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals | photos | labels |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 |
|
User Manua-1 | Users Manual | 4.06 MiB | October 27 2022 / April 27 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 |
|
User Manua-2 | Users Manual | 4.86 MiB | October 27 2022 / April 27 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 |
|
User Manual-3 | Users Manual | 5.33 MiB | October 27 2022 / April 27 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 |
|
User Manual-4 | Users Manual | 4.03 MiB | October 27 2022 / April 27 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 |
|
Internal Photograph | Internal Photos | 2.08 MiB | October 27 2022 / April 27 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 |
|
External Photograph | External Photos | 649.21 KiB | October 27 2022 / April 27 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 |
|
BPL-021X-PRO-LTEA-Q-T-PRM | ID Label/Location Info | 345.69 KiB | October 27 2022 / October 28 2022 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
BPL-021X-PRO-LTEA-Q-T-PRM PEPWAVE | ID Label/Location Info | 229.84 KiB | October 27 2022 / October 28 2022 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
Label location | ID Label/Location Info | 78.04 KiB | October 27 2022 / October 28 2022 | |||
1 2 3 | Test Report | October 27 2022 / October 28 2022 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Block Diagram | Block Diagram | October 27 2022 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
Confidentiality Request - STC | Cover Letter(s) | 1.32 MiB | October 27 2022 / October 28 2022 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
Confidentiality Request for LTC | Cover Letter(s) | 1.20 MiB | October 27 2022 / October 28 2022 | |||
1 2 3 | OD SW Security | Operational Description | October 27 2022 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 | Schematic | Schematics | October 27 2022 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
Test Photograph for 15B | Test Setup Photos | 1.16 MiB | October 27 2022 / April 27 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 |
|
Test Report for 15B | Test Report | 1.43 MiB | October 27 2022 / October 28 2022 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
MPE Report | RF Exposure Info | 199.89 KiB | October 27 2022 / October 28 2022 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
Test Report WiFi 2.4G | Test Report | 3.03 MiB | October 27 2022 / October 28 2022 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
WLAN Channel 12 13 | Cover Letter(s) | 248.49 KiB | October 27 2022 / October 28 2022 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
setup Photo for 15C E | Test Setup Photos | 361.94 KiB | October 27 2022 / April 27 2023 | delayed release | ||
1 2 3 |
|
Test Report 5G Band | Test Report | 2.86 MiB | October 28 2022 |
1 2 3 | User Manua-1 | Users Manual | 4.06 MiB | October 27 2022 / April 27 2023 | delayed release |
Balance User Manual Peplink Products:
20X Pro Peplink Balance Firmware 8.2.0 March 2022 COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS Specifications are subject to change without notice. Copyright 2021 Peplink Pepwave Ltd. All Rights Reserved. Pepwave and the Pepwave logo are trademarks of Peplink International Ltd. Other brands or products mentioned may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. Table of Contents Introduction and Scope Glossary Product Features WAN LAN VPN Inbound Traffic Management Outbound Policy AP Controller QoS Firewall Captive Portal Other Supported Features Advanced Feature Summary Drop-in Mode and LAN Bypass: Transparent Deployment QoS: Clearer VoIP Per-User Bandwidth Control High Availability via VRRP USB Modem and Android Tethering Built-In Remote User VPN Support LACP NIC Bonding KVM Virtualization DPI Engine NetFlow Wi-Fi Air Monitoring SP Default Configuration SpeedFusion Cloud Relay DNS over HTTPS (DoH) Package Contents Peplink Balance 20X Pro Peplink Balance Overview Peplink Balance 20X Pro 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 12 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 17 17 17 18 18 https://www.peplink.com 2 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Panel Appearance LED Indicators Flex Module Mini LCD Display Menu Installation Preparation Constructing the Network Basic Configuration Connecting to the Web Admin Interface Configuration with the Setup Wizard SpeedFusion Cloud Activate SpeedFusion Cloud Service Enable SpeedFusion Cloud Connect Clients to Cloud Link Wi-Fi to Cloud Optimize Cloud Application Network Tab WAN Health Check Settings Bandwidth Allowance Monitor Settings Additional Public IP Settings Dynamic DNS Settings LAN Network Settings Network Settings (Common Settings) Port Settings VPN SpeedFusion IPsec VPN GRE Tunnel Outbound Policy Inbound Access Servers Services DNS Settings 18 18 19 22 23 23 23 24 24 25 30 30 33 41 42 44 46 46 59 62 62 63 64 65 69 74 74 75 83 87 89 101 101 102 105 https://www.peplink.com 3 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink NAT Mappings MediaFast Setting Up MediaFast Content Caching Viewing MediaFast Statistics Prefetch Schedule ContentHub Configure a website for the ContentHub Configure an application for the ContentHub MDM Settings Docker KVM Captive Portal QoS User Groups Bandwidth Control Application Prioritization for Custom Application DSL/Cable Optimization Firewall Access Rules Intrusion Detection and DoS Prevention Content Blocking Application Blocking Web Blocking Customized Domains Exempted User Groups Exempted Subnets URL Logging Routing Protocols OSPF & RIPv2 BGP Remote User Access L2TP with IPsec OpenVPN PPTP Authentication Methods Misc. Settings 122 123 124 125 126 129 129 131 134 134 134 136 138 139 139 140 141 141 141 142 146 148 148 148 149 149 149 149 150 150 152 157 157 157 158 158 159 https://www.peplink.com 4 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink High Availability Certificate Manager Service Forwarding SMTP Forwarding Web Proxy Forwarding DNS Forwarding Custom Service Forwarding Service Passthrough NTP Server Grouped Networks Remote SIM Management SIM Toolkit AP Tab AP AP Controller Wireless SSID Wireless Mesh AP > Profiles AP Controller Status Info Access Points (Usage) Wireless SSID Wireless Client Mesh / WDS Nearby Device Event Log Toolbox System Tab System Admin Security Firmware Time Schedule Email Notification Event Log SNMP 159 163 164 165 165 166 166 167 167 168 169 172 173 174 174 175 180 180 184 184 185 188 188 190 191 191 192 192 193 193 197 199 199 201 204 204 https://www.peplink.com 5 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SMS Control InControl Configuration Feature Add-ons Reboot Tools Ping Traceroute Wake-on-LAN WAN Analysis CLI (Command Line) Support Status Tab Status Device Active Sessions Client List WINS Clients OSPF & RIPv2 MediaFast PepVPN / SpeedFusion Status Event Log Device Event Log IPsec Event Log WAN Quality Usage Reports Real-Time Hourly Daily Monthly Appendix Restoration of Factory Defaults Routing under DHCP, Static IP, and PPPoE FusionSIM Manual Harrington Industrial Plastics PLUSS Overview of ports used by Peplink SD-WAN routers and other Peplink services 207 208 209 211 211 211 212 213 213 213 217 218 218 218 220 222 223 223 224 225 228 229 229 230 230 230 230 232 234 235 236 236 239 255 258 267 https://www.peplink.com 6 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Troubleshooting 269 https://www.peplink.com 7 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Introduction and Scope Peplink Balance routers provide link aggregation and load balancing across multiple WAN connections. We develop products and technologies that can help you build SD-WAN networks with unbreakable connection resilience, unmatched deployment flexibility, and intuitive ease of use. Our product and technology focus has always been on WAN virtualization and the intelligent use of multiple WAN links at the same time to increase reliability and bandwidth whilst reducing costs. We have two key WAN virtualization technologies, Intelligent load balancing for Internet access and SpeedFusion VPN Bonding for secure branch to branch connectivity. The Peplink MediaFast series are a range of routers capable of content caching. Designed with education and entertainment in mind, MediaFast downloads and accelerates video, iTunes iOS updates, app downloads, and other content for uninterrupted learning and fun anytime. The MediaFast can prefetch content during off-peak hours, saving connectivity costs and reducing network burden during busy times. This manual applies to the following Peplink Balance products:
Peplink Balance 20X Pro The manual covers setting up your Peplink Balance or MediaFast and provides a collection of case studies detailing the advanced features of the Peplink Balance. 1 Glossary The following terms, acronyms, and abbreviations are frequently used in this manual:
Term 3G 4G Definition 3rd generation standards for wireless communications (e.g., HSDPA) 4th generation standards for wireless communications (e.g., LTE) DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DNS Domain Name System EVDO Evolution-Data Optimized FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name HSDPA High-Speed Downlink Packet Access HTTP ICMP Hyper-Text Transfer Protocol Internet Control Message Protocol IP Internet Protocol https://www.peplink.com 8 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink LAN Local Area Network MAC Address Media Access Control Address MTU MSS NAT Maximum Transmission Unit Maximum Segment Size Network Address Translation PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet QoS Quality of Service SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol TCP UDP VPN VRF Transmission Control Protocol User Datagram Protocol Virtual Private Network Virtual Routing and Forwarding VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol WAN Wide Area Network WINS Windows Internet Name Service WLAN Wireless Local Area Network 210+
380+
Refers to Peplink Balance 210/310/380/580/710/1350/2500 Refers to Peplink Balance 380/580/710/1350/2500 2 Product Features Peplink Balance Series products enable all LAN users to share broadband Internet connections and provide advanced features to enhance Internet access. The following is a list of supported features:
WAN Multiple public IP support (DHCP, PPPoE, static IP address) Static IP support for PPPoE 10/100/1000Mbps Ethernet connection in full/half duplex Built-in HSPA and EVDO cellular modems USB mobile connection (only one USB modem can be connected at a time) Drop-in mode on selectable WAN port with MAC address passthrough n etwork address translation (NAT) / port address translation (PAT) https://www.peplink.com 9 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Inbound and outbound NAT mapping Multiple static IP addresses per WAN connection MAC address clone Customizable MTU and MSS values WAN connection health check DNS Dynamic no-ip.org,tzo.com, and DNS-O-Matic) Ping, DNS lookup, and HTTP-based health check WAN throughput and consistency diagnosis WAN to WAN speed test USB Ethernet Adapter support
(supported service providers:
LAN changeip.com, dyndns.org, DHCP server on LAN Extended DHCP option support Static routing rules Local DNS proxy server 802.1q VLANs Port-based VLANs Virtual Network Mapping VPN Secure SpeedFusion TM SpeedFusion performance analyzer X.509 certificate support Bandwidth bonding and failover among selected WAN connections Ability to route traffic to a remote VPN peer Optional pre-shared key setting Layer 2 bridging Layer 2 Peer Isolation SpeedFusion TM throughput, ping, and traceroute tests Built-in L2TP / PPTP / OpenVPN VPN server Authenticate L2TP / PPTP clients using RADIUS and LDAP servers Multi-Site PepVPN Profile IPsec VPN for network-to-network connections L2TP / PPTP and IPsec passthrough Simultaneous L2 & L3 VPN tunnel between the same pair of devices https://www.peplink.com 10 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Inbound Trac Management TCP/UDP traffic redirection to dedicated LAN server(s) Inbound link load balancing by means of DNS Outbound Policy Link load distribution per TCP/UDP service Persistent routing for specified source and/or destination IP addresses per TCP/UDP service Prioritize and route traffic to VPN tunnels with Priority and Enforced algorithms Time-based scheduling AP Controller Configure and manage Pepwave AP devices Review the status of connected AP QoS Quality of service for different applications and custom protocols User group classification for different service levels Bandwidth usage control and monitoring on group- and user-level Application prioritization for custom protocols and DSL optimization Firewall Outbound (LAN to WAN) firewall rules Inbound (WAN to LAN) firewall rules per WAN connection Intrusion detection and prevention Specification of NAT mappings Web blocking Application blocking Time-based scheduling Outbound firewall rules can be defined by destination domain name Captive Portal Social Wi-Fi Hotspot Support Splash screen of open networks, login page for secure networks Customizable built-in captive portal Supports linking to outside page for captive portal https://www.peplink.com 11 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Other Supported Features Easy-to-use web administration interface HTTP and HTTPS support for web administration interface Configurable web administration port and administrator password Read-only user for web admin Shared-IP drop-in mode Authentication and accounting by RADIUS server for web admin Firmware upgrades, configuration backups, ping, and traceroute via web administration interface Remote web-based configuration (via WAN and LAN interfaces) Remote reporting to Peplink Balance reporting server Hardware high availability via VRRP, with automatic configuration synchronization Real-time, hourly, daily and monthly bandwidth usage reports and charts Hardware backup via LAN bypass Built-in WINS server Time server synchronization SNMP Email notification Syslog SIP passthrough PPTP packet passthrough Active sessions Active client list WINS client list UPnP / NAT-PMP Event log is persistent across reboots IPv6 support Support for USB tethering on Android phones https://www.peplink.com 12 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 3 Advanced Feature Summary 3.1 Drop-in Mode and LAN Bypass: Transparent Deployment As your organization grows, it may require more bandwidth, but modifying your network can be tedious. In Drop-in Mode , you can conveniently install your Peplink router without making any changes to your network. For any reason your Peplink router looses power, the LAN Bypass will safely and automatically bypass the Peplink router to resume your original network connection. 3.2 QoS: Clearer VoIP VoIP and videoconferencing are highly sensitive to latency. With QoS, Peplink routers can detect VoIP traffic and assign it the highest priority, giving you crystal-clear calls. https://www.peplink.com 13 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 3.3 Per-User Bandwidth Control With per-user bandwidth control, you can define bandwidth control policies for up to 3 groups of users to prevent network congestion. Define groups by IP address and subnet, and set bandwidth limits for every user in the group. 3.4 High Availability via VRRP When your organization has a corporate requirement demanding the highest availability with no single point of failure, you can deploy two Peplink routers in High Availability mode . With High Availability mode, the second device will take over when needed. https://www.peplink.com 14 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 3.5 USB Modem and Android Tethering For increased WAN diversity, plug in a USB LTE modem as backup. Peplink routers are compatible with over 200 modem types . You can also tether to smartphones running Android 4.1.X and above. By default, the USB port is USB Modem mode. If you need to use it to connect to USB Ethernet Adapter, you need to change it to USB Ethernet mode, https://forum.peplink.com/t/can-i-use-ethernet-adapters-on-the-usb-wan/8327 3.6 Built-In Remote User VPN Support Use OpenVPN or L2TP with IPsec to safely and conveniently connect remote clients to your private network. L2TP with IPsec is supported by most devices, but legacy devices can also connect using PPTP. Click here for the full instructions on setting up L2TP with IPsec. Click here for the full instructions on setting up OpenVPN connections https://www.peplink.com 15 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 3.7 LACP NIC Bonding Use 802.3ad to combine multiple LAN connections into a virtual LAN connection. This virtual connection has higher throughput and redundancy in case any single link fails. 3.8 KVM Virtualization KVM is a virtualisation module that allows administrators using our routers to host a large range of virtual machines. KVM is now supported by some of the MediaFast / ContentHub routers. Click here for the full instructions on how to set up KVM Click here for the full instructions on how to set up KVM with USB Storage 3.9 DPI Engine The DPI report written in the updated KB article will show further information on InControl2 through breaking down application categories into subcategories. https://forum.peplink.com/t/updated-ic2-deep-packet-inspection-dpi-reports-and-everything-you-
need-to-know-about-it/29658 https://www.peplink.com 16 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 3.10 NetFlow NetFlow protocol is used to track network traffic. Tracking information from NetFlow can be sent to the NetFlow collector, which analyzes data and generates reports for review. Note : To enable this feature, go to https://<Device's IP>/cgi-bin/MANGA/support.cgi 3.11 Wi-Fi Air Monitoring Peplink routers support Wi-Fi Air Monitoring Mode which is used to troubleshoot remotely and proactively monitor Wi-Fi and WAN performance. After enabling Wi-Fi Air Monitoring, reports can be viewed under InControl 2 > Reports > AirProbe Reports . Note : To enable this feature, go to https://<Device's IP>/cgi-bin/MANGA/support.cgi 3.12 SP Default Conguration The SP Default Configuration feature written in the updated KB article allows for the provisioning of custom made settings (a.k.a. InControl2 configuration) via the Ethernet LAN port and is ideal for those wanting to do a bulk deployment of many Peplink devices. Note : If you would like to use this feature, please contact your purchase point (Eg.VAD). 3.13 SpeedFusion Cloud Relay Cloud Service Providers often restrict access to certain applications. With SFC Relay, you can route traffic before going out to the Internet, allowing access to previously restricted applications experienced with the public SpeedFusion Cloud nodes. Available as an add-on for your home router or as an upgradable license to your Peplink router, SFC Relay is sure to impress you and any peers you give access to. https://forum.peplink.com/t/configure-speedfusion-cloud-relay-server-and-client/6215ca9b017e4 8e0f3ff2479/
https://www.peplink.com 17 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 3.14 DNS over HTTPS (DoH) DoH provides the benefits of communicating DNS information over a secure HTTPS connection in an encrypted manner. The protocol offers increased privacy and confidentiality by preventing data interception and man-in-the-middle attacks. 4 Package Contents The contents of Peplink Balance product packages are as follows:
4.1 Peplink Balance 20X Pro Peplink Balance 20X Pro 2x LTE Antenna, 1x GPS Antenna, 2x Wi-Fi Antenna Power adapter Information slip https://www.peplink.com 18 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 5 Peplink Balance Overview 5.1 Peplink Balance 20X Pro 5.1.1 Panel Appearance 5.1.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows :
Power and Status Indicators Status OFF Upgrading firmware Red Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready LAN and WAN Ports Green LED ON 1000 Mbps OFF 10 / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports https://www.peplink.com 19 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Wi-Fi AP OFF ON Disabled Enabled Wi-Fi AP Indicators USB Ports For connecting a 4G/3G USB modem USB Port 5.1.3 Flex Module Mini Interface Antenna Connectors 1x LTE-A Module 1x Embedded LTE-A Cellular Modems with Redundant SIM Slots 2x SMA Cellular Antenna Connectors Downlink / Uplink Datarate 300Mbps/50Mbps (CAT-6) 600Mbps/150Mbps (CAT-12) Power Consumption 10W Weight 0.83 pounds | 375 grams https://www.peplink.com 20 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Interface Antenna Connectors 1xLTE-A Module 1x Embedded LTE-A Cellular Modems with Redundant SIM Slots 4x SMA Cellular Antenna Connectors Downlink / Uplink Datarate 1.2 Gbps/150 Mbps (CAT-18) Power Consumption 10W Weight 0.83 pounds | 375 grams 1x VDSL Module Interface 1x RJ11 Connector, 1x Status LED Power Consumption 9W Weight 0.44 pounds | 200 grams https://www.peplink.com 21 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 6 LCD Display Menu
> HA State: Master/Slave
> LAN IP
> VIP
> System Status
> System
> Firmware ver.
> Serial number
> System time
> System uptime
> CPU load
> LAN
> Status
> IP address
> Subnet mask
> Link status
> WAN1
> WAN2
> WAN3*
> VPN status
> VPN Profile 1
> VPN Profile 2
> VPN Profile n
> Link usage
> Throughput in
> WAN1
> WAN2
> WAN3*
> Throughput out
> WAN1
> WAN2
> WAN3*
> Data Transfered
> WAN1
> WAN2
> WAN3*
> Maintenance
(shows firmware version)
(shows serial number)
(shows current time)
(shows system uptime since last reboot)
(shows current CPU loading, 0-100%)
(shows LAN port physical status)
(shows LAN IP address)
(shows LAN subnet mask)
(shows Connected/Disconnected, IP address list)
(shows Connected/Disconnected)
(shows transfer rate in Kbps)
(shows transfer rate in Kbps)
(shows volume transferred since last reboot in MB)
> Reboot > Reboot? (Yes/No)
> Factory default > Factory default? (Yes/No)
(to reboot the unit)
(to restore factory defaults)
> LAN config
> Port speed
> LAN
> WAN1
> WAN2
> WAN3*
*Layout continues as such for all available WAN ports
(shows port speed: Auto, 10baseT-FD, 10baseT-HD, 100baseTx-FD, 100baseTx-HD, 1000baseTx-FD) https://www.peplink.com 23 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 7 Installation The following section details connecting the Peplink Balance to your network:
7.1 Preparation Before installing your Peplink Balance, please prepare the following:
At least one Internet/WAN access account For each network connection, one 10/100BaseT UTP cable with RJ45 connector, one 1000BaseT Cat5E UTP cable for the Gigabit port, or one USB modem for the USB WAN port A computer with the TCP/IP network protocol and a web browser installed Supported browsers include Microsoft Internet Explorer 11 or above, Mozilla Firefox 24 or above, Apple Safari 7 or above, and Google Chrome 18 or above. 7.2 Constructing the Network At the high level, construct the network according to the following steps:
1. 2. 3. With an Ethernet cable, connect a computer to one of the LAN ports on the Peplink Balance. For Peplink Balance models that support multiple connections, repeat with different cables connect up to 4 computers. With another Ethernet cable, connect the WAN/broadband modem to one of the WAN ports on the Peplink Balance. Repeat using different cables to connect from two to 13 WAN/broadband connections or connect a USB modem to the USB WAN port. Connect the provided power adapter or cord to the power connector on the Peplink Balance, and then plug the power adapter into a power outlet. https://www.peplink.com 24 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 8 Basic Conguration 8.1 Connecting to the Web Admin Interface Start a web browser on a computer that is connected with the Peplink Balance through the LAN. To connect to the web admin of the Peplink Balance, enter the following LAN IP address in the address field of the web browser:
https://192.168.1.1
(This is the default LAN IP address of the Peplink to the Enter access the web admin interface. Balance.) following Username : admin Password : admin
(This is the default admin user login of the Peplink Balance. ) You must change the default password on the first successful logon. Password requirements are: A minimum of 10 lower AND upper case characters, including at least 1 number. When HTTP is selected, the URL will be redirected to HTTPS by default. After successful login, the Dashboard of the web admin interface will be displayed. Important Note The Save button causes the changes to be saved. Configuration changes (e.g., WAN, LAN, admin settings, etc.) take effect after clicking the Apply Changes button on each pages top-right corner. https://www.peplink.com 25 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 8.2 Conguration with the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard simplifies the task of configuring WAN connection(s) by guiding the configuration process step-by-step. To begin, click Setup Wizard after connecting to the web admin interface. Click Next >> to begin. Select Yes if you want to set up drop-in mode using the Setup Wizard. https://www.peplink.com 26 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click on the appropriate checkbox(es) to select the WAN connection(s) to be configured. If you have chosen to configure drop-in mode using the Setup Wizard, the WAN port to be configured in drop-in mode will be checked by default. If drop-in mode is going to be configured, the setup wizard will move on to Drop-in Settings . https://www.peplink.com 27 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink If you are not using drop-in mode, select the connection method for the WAN connection(s) from the following screen:
Depending on the selection of connection type, further configuration may be needed. For example, PPPoE and static IP require additional settings for the selected WAN port. Please refer to Section 13, Configuring the WAN Interface(s) for details on setting up DHCP, static IP, and PPPoE. If Mobile Internet Connection is checked, the setup wizard will move on to Operator Settings . https://www.peplink.com 28 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink If Custom Mobile Operator Settings is selected, APN parameters are required. Some service providers may charge a fee for connecting to a different APN. Please consult your service provider for the correct settings. on Click box(es) to select the preferred WAN connection(s). Connection(s) not selected in this step will be used as a backup only. Click Next >> to continue. appropriate check the Choose the time zone of your country/region. Check the box Show all to display all time zone options. https://www.peplink.com 29 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Check in the following screen to make sure all settings have been configured correctly, and then click Save Settings to confirm. After finishing the last step in the setup wizard, click Apply Changes on the page header to allow the configuration changes to take effect. https://www.peplink.com 30 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 9 SpeedFusion Cloud With Peplink products, your device is able to connect to SpeedFusion Cloud without the use of a second endpoint. This service has wide access to a number of SpeedFusion endpoints hosted from around the world, providing your device with unbreakable connectivity wherever you are.*
*SpeedFusion Cloud is supported in firmware version 8.1.0 and above. SpeedFusion Cloud is a subscription basis. SpeedFusion Cloud license can be purchased at https://store.peplink.com/
> Cloud Solutions > SpeedFusion Cloud Service . 9.1 Activate SpeedFusion Cloud Service You are entitled to a 30-day free period with 100GB of SpeedFusion usage upon activation of the SpeedFusion Cloud service. This offer is limited to once per device. To get your activation key please visit SpeedFusion Cloud. https://www.peplink.com 31 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Go to activate.speedfusion.com and select the type of SpeedFusion Cloud service, Via Free 30-days Trial or Via Care Plans, that you would like to activate. Next, register or login to your account. Select the devices that you wish to activate SpeedFusion Cloud on and click ACTIVATE . https://www.peplink.com 32 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink From System > Features Add-ons , paste the license key into the window and click on Activate once you have received the license key. https://www.peplink.com 33 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 9.2 Enable SpeedFusion Cloud Access the Web Admin of the device you want to create as the SFC Relay Server, navigating to the SpeedFusion Cloud tab. To setup a SpeedFusion Cloud Relay Server, select " Setup Home Sharing " > Choose the Cloud Location you wish to connect to >
Click on the green tick button to confirm the change. https://www.peplink.com 34 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The Home Sharing Code will be generated and other peers can use this code to establish a SpeedFusion Cloud connection that will forward the traffic to this device, allowing them to access local networks and the Internet via your WAN connection. To connect to SpeedFusion Cloud, you can select a Cloud Location of your choice, or simply Automatic , then the device will establish a connection to the nearest cloud server. Choose Automatic > Click on the green tick button to confirm the change. https://www.peplink.com 35 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Or you may select Home Sharing and use your Home Sharing Code to create a profile if you have set up a SpeedFusion Cloud Relay Client on another device. Click on Apply Changes to save the change. https://www.peplink.com 36 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink By default, the router will build a SpeedFusion tunnel to the SpeedFusion Cloud https://www.peplink.com 37 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink If you are running a latency sensitive service like video streaming or VOIP, a WAN Smoothing sub-tunnel can be created. Navigate to Speedfusion Cloud > Choose a cloud location >
SFC . https://www.peplink.com 38 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink A Speedfusion tunnel configuration window will pop out. Click on the + sign to create the WAN Smoothing sub-tunnel. https://www.peplink.com 39 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click on Save and Apply Changes to save the configuration. Now, the router has 2 Speedfusion tunnels to the Speedfusion Cloud. https://www.peplink.com 40 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Create an outbound policy to steer the internet traffic to go into Speedfusion Cloud. Please go to Advanced > Outbound Policy , click on Add Rule to create a new outbound policy. https://www.peplink.com 41 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 9.3 Connect Clients to Cloud SpeedFusion Cloud provides a convenient way to route the LAN client to the cloud. From SpeedFusion Cloud > Connect Clients to Cloud . https://www.peplink.com 42 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Choose a client from the drop down list > Click + > Save > Apply Changes . 9.4 Link Wi-Fi to Cloud SpeedFusion Cloud provides a convenient way to route the Wi-Fi client to the cloud from SpeedFusion Cloud > Link Wi-Fi to Cloud . This option is available for Balance 20X Pro, Balance 30 Pro, and Balance One . https://www.peplink.com 43 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Create a new SSID for SpeedFusion Cloud. The new SSID will inherit all settings from one of the existing SSIDs including the Security Policy. Then click Save follow by Apply Changes . SpeedFusion Cloud SSID will be shown on Dashboard . https://www.peplink.com 44 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 9.5 Optimize Cloud Application Optimize Cloud Application allows you to route Internet traffic through SpeedFusion Cloud based on the application. Go to SpeedFusion Cloud > Optimize Cloud Application . https://www.peplink.com 45 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Select a Cloud application to route through SpeedFusion Cloud from the drop down list > Click
> Save > Apply Changes. Click the to remove a selected Cloud application from routing through SpeedFusion Cloud. https://www.peplink.com 46 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10 Network Tab 10.1 WAN From Network > WAN , choose a WAN connection by clicking it. IPv6 You can also enable IPv6 support in this section. DNS over HTTPS (DoH) You can enable the DoH support in this section. https://www.peplink.com 47 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink DNS over HTTPS Enable When this option is enabled, the DNS proxy server will use HTTPS connections to forward DNS requests to the DoH resolver; it will not fallback to traditional UDP DNS options. The options to configure DoH with a predefined server are:
Server Cloudflare - The DNS server IP addresses for Cloudflare will be using 1.1.1.1, which is unfiltered. Quad9 - The DNS server IP addresses for Quad9 will be using 9.9.9.9 and 142.112.112.112, which is malware blocking and DNSSEC. Google DNS - The DNS server IP 8.8.8.8 and 8.8.4.4, which is RFC8484 standard. OpenDNS 208.67.222.222 and 208.67.220.220, which is standard DNS. Custom URL - You may select Custom URL: , and enter the resolver URL and IP address .
- The DNS server IP addresses for OpenDNS will be using addresses for Google DNS will be using WAN Quality Monitoring This settings advice how WAN Quality information is being gathered. By default, WAN Quality will always be observed and gathered automatically. With customized choice of WAN connections, the device will always observe WAN Quality of those selected WAN connections. Other WAN connections may stop observing WAN Quality information if it is not necessary for the underlying features. https://www.peplink.com 48 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WAN Connection Settings (Ethernet) Clicking an Ethernet WAN connection will result in the following screen:
WAN Connection Settings WAN Connection Name Enter a name to represent this WAN connection. Enable This setting enables the WAN connection. If schedules have been defined, you will be able to select a schedule to apply to the connection. There are five possible connection methods for Ethernet WAN:
DHCP Connection Method Static IP https://www.peplink.com 49 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink PPPoE L2TP GRE The connection method and details are determined by, and can be obtained from the ISP. See the following sections for details on each connection method. DNS server settings can be configured in the corresponding menu for each connection method. Routing Mode This field shows that NAT (network address translation) will be applied to the traffic routed over this WAN connection. IP Forwarding is available when you click the link in the help icon. Hostname
(Optional) If your service provider's DHCP server requires you to supply a hostname value upon acquiring an IP address, you may enter the value here. If your service provider does not provide you with a hostname, you can safely bypass this option. https://www.peplink.com 50 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Management IP Address DNS Servers Management IP Address is available for configuration when you click the link in the help icon via the Hostname. This option allows you to configure the management IP address for the DHCP WAN connection. Each ISP may provide a set of DNS servers for DNS lookups. This setting specifies the DNS (Domain Name System) servers to be used when a DNS lookup is routed through this connection. Selecting Obtain DNS server address automatically results in the DNS servers assigned by the WAN DHCP server being used for outbound DNS lookups over the connection. (The DNS servers are obtained along with the WAN IP address assigned by the DHCP server.) When the following DNS server address(es) is selected, you may enter custom DNS server addresses for this WAN connection into the DNS server 1 and DNS server 2 fields. This option allows you to configure the WAN connection whether for normal daily usage or as a backup connection only. Connection Priority If Always-on is chosen, the WAN connection will be kept on continuously, regardless of the priority of other WAN connections. If Backup is chosen, the WAN connection will depend on other WAN connections. It will not be used when one or more higher priority dependent WAN connections are connected. Independent from Backup WANs Reply to ICMP PING Upload Bandwidth Download Bandwidth If this is checked, the connection will be working independent from other Backup WAN connections. Those in Backup Priority will ignore the status of this WAN connection, and will be used when none of the other higher priority connections are available. If the checkbox is unticked , this option is disabled and the system will not reply to any ICMP ping echo requests to the WAN IP addresses of this WAN connection. Default: ticked (Yes) This field refers to the maximum upload speed. This value is referenced when default weight is chosen for outbound traffic and traffic prioritization. A correct value can result in effective traffic prioritization and efficient use of upstream bandwidth. This field refers to the maximum download speed. Default weight control for outbound traffic will be adjusted according to this value. https://www.peplink.com 51 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WAN Connection Settings (Cellular) Clicking an Ethernet WAN connection will result in the following screens:
WAN Connection Settings WAN Connection Name Indicate a name you wish to give this WAN connection Enable Click the checkbox to toggle the on and off state of this connection. Routing Mode This option allows you to select the routing method to be used in routing IP frames via the WAN connection. The mode can be either NAT (Network Address Translation) or IP Forwarding. In the case if you need to choose IP Forwarding for your scenario. Click the enable IP Forwarding. button to DNS Servers Each ISP may provide a set of DNS servers for DNS lookups. This setting specifies the DNS (Domain Name System) servers to be used when a DNS lookup is routed through this connection. Selecting Obtain DNS server address automatically results in the DNS servers assigned by the WAN DHCP server being used for outbound DNS lookups over the connection. (The DNS servers are obtained along with the WAN IP address assigned by the DHCP server.) When Use the following DNS server address(es) is selected, you may enter custom DNS server addresses for this WAN connection into the DNS server 1 and DNS server 2 fields. This option allows you to configure the WAN connection whether for normal daily usage or as a backup connection only. Connection Priority If Always-on is chosen, the WAN connection will be kept on continuously, regardless of the priority of other WAN connections. If Backup is chosen, the WAN connection will depend on other WAN connections. It will not be used when one or more higher priority dependent WAN connections are connected. https://www.peplink.com 52 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Independent from Backup WANs If this is checked, the connection will be working independent from other Backup WAN connections. Those in Backup Priority will ignore the status of this WAN connection, and will be used when none of the other higher priority connections are available. Idle Disconnect If this is checked, the connection will disconnect when idle after the configured Time value. This option is disabled by default. Reply to ICMP PING If the checkbox is unticked , this option is disabled and the system will not reply to any ICMP ping echo requests to the WAN IP addresses of this WAN connection. Default: ticked (Yes) https://www.peplink.com 53 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Cellular Settings SIM Card Indicate which SIM card this cellular WAN will use. Only applies to cellular WAN with redundant SIM cards. For routers that support the SIM Injector, you may select the Use Remote SIM Only to provision a SIM from a SIM Injector. Further details on the SIM Injector found is available here: https://www.peplink.com/products/sim-injector/ . Preferred SIM Card If Both SIMs were selected on the above field, then you can designate the priority of the SIM card slots here. If Use Remote SIM Only is selected in the SIM card section, the Remote SIM Settings will be shown. Remote SIM Settings You may need to enable the remote SIM Host settings in the Remote SIM management, see the section 13.14.7 or Appendix C for more details on FusionSIM. After that, click on Scan nearby remote SIM server to show the serial number(s) of the connected SIM Injector(s). If you want to select a specific SIM, in the Cellular Settings, type : and then the number of the SIM slot, eg.1111-2222-3333:7. LTE/3G This drop-down menu allows restricting cellular to particular band. Click the enable the selection of specific bands. button to Optimal Network Discovery Cellular WAsN by default will only handover from 3G to LTE network when there is no active data traffic, enable this option will make it run the handover procedures after fallback to 3G for a defined effective period, even this may interrupt the connectivity for a short while. Band Selection When set to Auto, band selection allows for automatically connecting to available, supported bands (frequencies) . When set to Manual, you can manually select the bands (frequencies) the SIM will connect to. Data Roaming This checkbox enables data roaming on this particular SIM card. When data roaming is enabled this option allows you to select in which countries the SIM has a data connection. The option is configured by using MMC (country) codes.Please check your service providers data roaming policy before proceeding. Authentication Choose from PAP Only or CHAP Only to use those authentication methods exclusively. Select Auto to automatically choose an authentication method. Operator Settings This setting allows you to configure the APN settings of your connection. If Auto is selected, the mobile operator should be detected automatically. The connected device will be configured and connection will be made automatically. If there is any difficulty in making connections, you may select Custom to enter your carriers APN , Login , Password , and https://www.peplink.com 54 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Dial Number settings manually. The correct values can be obtained from your carrier. The default and recommended setting is Auto . When Auto is selected, the information in these fields will be filled automatically. Select Custom to customize these parameters. The parameter values are determined by and can be obtained from the ISP. Check the box Enable to enable bandwidth usage monitoring on this WAN connection for each billing cycle. When this option is not enabled, bandwidth usage of each month is still being tracked but no action will be taken. If email notification is enabled, you will be notified by email when usage hits 75% and 95% of the monthly allowance. If Disconnect when usage hits 100% of monthly allowance is checked, this WAN connection will be disconnected automatically when the usage hits the monthly allowance. It will not resume connection unless this option has been turned off or the usage has been reset when a new billing cycle starts. This option allows you to define which day of the month each billing cycle begins. This field is for defining the maximum bandwidth usage allowed for the WAN connection each month. APN / Login /
Password / SIM PIN Bandwidth Allowance Monitor Action Start Day Monthly Allowance Signal Threshold Settings If signal threshold is defined, this connection will be treated as down when a weaker than threshold signal is determined. The following values are used by the threshold scale:
To define the threshold manually using question Mark and the following field will be visible. specific signal strength values, please click on the https://www.peplink.com 55 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WAN Connection Settings (USB) WAN Connection Settings Indicate a name you wish to give this WAN connection WAN Connection Name Enable This setting enables the WAN connection. If schedules have been defined, you will be able to select a schedule to apply to the connection. DNS Server Each ISP may provide a set of DNS servers for DNS lookups. This setting specifies the DNS (Domain Name System) servers to be used when a DNS lookup is routed through this connection. Selecting Obtain DNS server address automatically results in the DNS servers assigned by the WAN DHCP server being used for outbound DNS lookups over the connection. (The DNS servers are obtained along with the WAN IP address assigned by the DHCP server.) When Use the following DNS server address(es) is selected, you may enter custom DNS server addresses for this WAN connection into the DNS server 1 and DNS server 2 fields. This option allows you to configure the WAN connection whether for normal daily usage or as a backup connection only. Connection Priority If Always-on is chosen, the WAN connection will be kept on continuously, regardless of the priority of other WAN connections. If Backup is chosen, the WAN connection will depend on other WAN connections. It will not be used when one or more higher priority dependent WAN connections are connected. Standby State This option allows you to choose whether to remain the connection connected or disconnect it when this WAN connection is no longer in the highest priority and has entered the standby state. Idle Disconnect If this is checked, the connection will disconnect when idle after the configured Time value. This option is disabled by default. Reply to ICMP Ping If the checkbox is unticked , this option is disabled and the system will not reply to any ICMP ping echo requests to the WAN IP addresses of this WAN connection. Default: ticked (Yes) https://www.peplink.com 56 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink By default, the USB port is USB Modem mode. If you need to use it to connect to USB Ethernet Adapter, you need to change it to USB Ethernet mode, by enabling the hidden feature
. Once this feature is enabled, the interface will behave as normal Ethernet WAN. The options that are the same as the ethernet WAN connection configuration are shown in the Ethernet WAN section. ModemSettings Operator Settings APN / Login /
Password / SIM PIN This setting allows you to configure the APN settings of your connection. If Auto is selected, the mobile operator should be detected automatically. The connected device will be configured and connection will be made automatically. If there is any difficulty in making connections, you may select Custom to enter your carriers APN , Login , Password , and Dial Number settings manually. The correct values can be obtained from your carrier. The default and recommended setting is Auto . When Auto is selected, the information in these fields will be filled automatically. Select Custom to customize these parameters. The parameter values are determined by and can be obtained from the ISP. WAN Connection Settings (Common) The remaining WAN-related settings are common to both Ethernet and cellular WAN https://www.peplink.com 57 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Physical Interface Settings This is the port speed of the WAN connection. It should be set to the same speed as the connected device in case of any port negotiation problems. Speed When a static speed is set, you may choose whether to advertise its speed to the peer device or not. Advertise Speed is selected by default. You can choose not to advertise the port speed if the port has difficulty in negotiating with the peer device. Default: Auto MTU This field is for specifying the Maximum Transmission Unit value of the WAN connection. An excessive MTU value can cause file downloads stall shortly after connected. You may consult your ISP for the connection's MTU value. Default value is 1440. This field is for specifying the Maximum Segment Size of the WAN connection. When Auto is selected, MSS will be depended on the MTU value. When Custom is selected, you may enter a value for MSS. This value will be announced to remote TCP servers for maximum data that it can receive during the establishment of TCP connections. MSS Some Internet servers are unable to listen to MTU setting if ICMP is filtered by firewall between the connections. Normally, MSS equals to MTU minus 40. You are recommended to reduce the MSS only if changing of the MTU value cannot effectively inform some remote servers to size down data size. Default: Auto MAC Address Clone Some service providers (e.g. cable network) identify the client's MAC address and require client to always use the same MAC address to connect to the network. If it is the case, you may change the WAN interface's MAC address to the client PC's one by entering the PC's MAC address to this field. If you are not sure, click the Default button to restore to the default value. VLAN Check the box to assign a VLAN to the interface. DHCP Settings Hostname
(Optional) If your service provider's DHCP server requires you to supply a hostname value upon acquiring an IP address, you may enter the value here. If your service provider does not provide you with a hostname, you can safely bypass this option. https://www.peplink.com 58 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink DNS Servers Each ISP may provide a set of DNS servers for DNS lookups. This setting specifies the DNS (Domain Name System) servers to be used when a DNS lookup is routed through this connection. Selecting Obtain DNS server address automatically results in the DNS servers assigned by the WAN DHCP server being used for outbound DNS lookups over the connection. (The DNS servers are obtained along with the WAN IP address assigned by the DHCP server.) When Use the following DNS server address(es) is selected, you may enter custom DNS server addresses for this WAN connection into the DNS server 1 and DNS server 2 fields. https://www.peplink.com 59 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Health Check Settings To ensure traffic is routed to healthy WAN connections only, the Peplink Balance can periodically check the health of each WAN connection. Health Check settings for each WAN connection can be independently configured via Network
> Interfaces > WAN > *Connection name* > Health Check Settings. Enable Health Check by selecting PING, DNS Lookup, or HTTP from the Health Check Method drop-down menu. Health Check Settings Method This setting specifies the health check method for the WAN connection. This value can be configured as Disabled , PING , DNS Lookup , or HTTP . The default method is DNS Lookup . For mobile Internet connections, the value of Method can be configured as Disabled or SmartCheck . Health Check Disabled When Disabled is chosen in the Method field, the WAN connection will always be considered as up. The connection will NOT be treated as down in the event of IP routing errors. Health Check Method: PING ICMP ping packets will be issued to test the connectivity with a configurable target IP address or hostname. A WAN connection is considered as up if ping responses are received from either one or both of the ping hosts. PING Hosts This setting specifies IP addresses or hostnames with which connectivity is to be tested via ICMP ping. If Use first two DNS servers as Ping Hosts is checked, the target ping host will be the first DNS server for the corresponding WAN connection. Reliable ping hosts with a high uptime should be considered. By default, the first two DNS servers of the WAN connection are used as the ping hosts. Health Check Method: DNS Lookup https://www.peplink.com 60 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink DNS lookups will be issued to test connectivity with target DNS servers. The connection will be treated as up if DNS responses are received from one or both of the servers, regardless of whether the result was positive or negative. Health Check DNS Servers This field allows you to specify two DNS hosts IP addresses with which connectivity is to be tested via DNS Lookup. If Use first two DNS servers as Health Check DNS Servers is checked, the first two DNS servers will be the DNS lookup targets for checking a connection's health. If the box is not checked, Host 1 must be filled, while a value for Host 2 is optional. If Include public DNS servers is selected and no response is received from all specified DNS servers, DNS lookups will also be issued to some public DNS servers. A WAN connection will be treated as down only if there is also no response received from the public DNS servers. Connections will be considered as up if DNS responses are received from any one of the health check DNS servers, regardless of a positive or negative result. By default, the first two DNS servers of the WAN connection are used as the health check DNS servers. Health Check Method: HTTP HTTP connections will be issued to test connectivity with configurable URLs and strings to match. URL1 WAN Settings>WAN Edit>Health Check Settings>URL1 The URL will be retrieved when performing an HTTP health check. When String to Match is left blank, a health check will pass if the HTTP return code is between 200 and 299
(Note: HTTP redirection codes 301 or 302 are treated as failures). When String to Match is filled, a health check will pass if the HTTP return code is between 200 and 299 and if the HTTP response content contains the string. URL 2 WAN Settings>WAN Edit>Health Check Settings>URL2 If URL2 is also provided, a health check will pass if either one of the tests passed. https://www.peplink.com 61 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Other Health Check Settings Timeout This setting specifies the timeout in seconds for ping/DNS lookup requests. The default timeout is 5 seconds . Health Check Interval Health Check Retries This setting specifies the time interval in seconds between ping or DNS lookup requests. The default health check interval is 5 seconds . This setting specifies the number of consecutive ping/DNS lookup timeouts after which the Peplink Balance will treat the corresponding WAN connection as down. Default health retries is set to 3 . Using the default Health Retries setting of 3 , the corresponding WAN connection will be treated as down after three consecutive timeouts. Recovery Retries This setting specifies the number of consecutive successful ping/DNS lookup responses that must be received before the Peplink Balance treats a previously down WAN connection as up again. By default, Recover Retries is set to 3 . Using the default setting, a WAN connection that is treated as down will be considered as up again upon receiving three consecutive successful ping/DNS lookup responses. Note If a WAN connection goes down, all of the WAN connections not set with a Connection Type of Always-on will also be brought up until any one of higher priority WAN connections is up and found to be healthy. This design could increase overall network availability. For example, if WAN1, WAN2, and WAN3 have connection types of Always-on , Backup Priority Group 1 , and Backup Priority Group 2 , respectively, when WAN1 goes down, WAN2 and WAN3 will try to connect. If WAN3 is connected first, WAN2 will still be kept connecting. If WAN2 is connected, WAN3 will disconnect or stop connecting. Automatic Public DNS Server Check on DNS Test Failure When the health check method is set to DNS Lookup and checks fail, the Balance will automatically perform DNS lookups on some public DNS servers. If the tests are successful, the WAN may not be down, but rather the target DNS server malfunctioned. You will see the following warning message on the main page:
https://www.peplink.com 62 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Bandwidth Allowance Monitor Settings Bandwidth Allowance Monitor If Email Notification is enabled, you will be notified by email when usage hits 75% and 95% of the monthly allowance. If Disconnect when usage hits 100% of monthly allowance is checked, this WAN connection will be disconnected automatically when the usage hits the monthly allowance. It will not resume connection unless this option has been turned off or the usage has been reset when a new billing cycle starts. This option allows you to define which day of the month each billing cycle begins. This field is for defining the maximum bandwidth usage allowed for the WAN connection each month. Action Start Day Monthly Allowance Due to different network protocol overheads and conversions, the amount of data reported by this Peplink device is not representative of actual billable data usage as metered by your network provider. Peplink disclaims any obligation or responsibility for any events arising from the use of the numbers shown here. Disclaimer Additional Public IP Settings https://www.peplink.com 63 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Additional Public IP Settings IP Address List IP Address List represents the list of fixed Internet IP addresses assigned by the ISP in the event that more than one Internet IP address is assigned to this WAN connection. Enter the fixed Internet IP addresses and the corresponding subnet mask, and then click the Down Arrow button to populate IP address entries to the IP Address List . Dynamic DNS Settings Peplink Balance routers allow registering domain name relationships to dynamic DNS service providers. Through registration with dynamic DNS service provider(s), the default public Internet IP address of each WAN connection can be associated with a hostname. With dynamic DNS service enabled for a WAN connection, you can connect to your WAN's IP address externally even if its IP address is dynamic. You must register for an account from the listed dynamic DNS service providers before enabling this option. If the WAN connection's IP address is a reserved private IP address (i.e., behind a NAT router), the public IP of each WAN will be automatically reported to the DNS service provider. Either upon a change in IP addresses or every 23 days without link reconnection, the Peplink Balance will connect to the dynamic DNS service provider to update the providers IP address records. The settings for dynamic DNS service provider(s) and the association of hostname(s) are configured via Network>Interfaces>WAN>*Connection name*>Dynamic DNS Settings . If your desired provider is not listed, you may check with DNS-O-Matic . This service supports updating 30 other dynamic DNS service providers. (Note: Peplink is not affiliated with DNS-O-Matic.) https://www.peplink.com 64 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Dynamic DNS Settings This setting specifies the dynamic DNS service provider to be used for the WAN. Supported providers are:
Service Provider changeip.com dyndns.org no-ip.org tzo.com DNS-O-Matic Others support custom Dynamic DNS servers by entering its URL. Works with any service compatible with DynDNS API. Select Disabled to disable this feature. This setting specifies the registered user name for the dynamic DNS service. This setting specifies the password for the dynamic DNS service. User ID / User /
Email Password / Pass /
TZO Key Update All Hosts Check this box to automatically update all hosts. Hosts / IDs This setting specifies a list of hostnames or domains to be associated with the public Internet IP address of the WAN connection. Important Note In order to use dynamic DNS services, appropriate hostname registration(s), as well as a valid account with a supported dynamic DNS service provider, are required. A dynamic DNS update is performed whenever a WANs IP address is changed, such as when an IP is changed after a DHCP IP refresh or reconnection. Due to dynamic DNS service providers policies, a dynamic DNS host expires automatically when the host record has not been not updated for a long time. Therefore, the Peplink Balance performs an update every 23 days, even if a WANs IP address did not change. https://www.peplink.com 65 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.2 LAN 10.2.1 Network Settings LAN interface settings are located at Network>LAN>Network Settings . Navigating to that page will show the following dashboard:
This represents the LAN interfaces that are active on your router (including VLAN). A grey X means that the VLAN is used in other settings and cannot be deleted. You can find which settings are using the VLAN by hovering over the grey X. Alternatively, a red X means that there are no settings using the VLAN. You can delete that VLAN by clicking the red X Clicking on any of the existing LAN interfaces (or creating a new one) will show the following :
IP Address The IP address and subnet mask of the Pepwave router on the LAN. IP Settings Network Settings Name Enter a name for the LAN. VLAN ID Enter a number for your VLAN. Inter-VLAN Check this box to enable routing between virtual LANs. https://www.peplink.com 66 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink routing PepVPN Profiles to Bridge Remote Network Isolation Spanning Tree Protocol Override IP Address when bridge connected DHCP Option 82 Layer 2 PepVPN Bridging The remote network of the selected PepVPN profiles will be bridged with this local LAN, creating a Layer 2 PepVPN, they will be connected and operate like a single LAN, and any broadcast or multicast packets will be sent over the VPN. Enable this option if you want to block network traffic between the remote networks, this will not affect the connectivity between them and this local LAN. Click the box will enable STP for this layer 2 profile bridge. Select "Do not override" if the LAN IP address and local DHCP server should remain unchanged after the Layer 2 PepVPN is up. If you choose to override IP address when the VPN is connected, the device will not act as a router, and most Layer 3 routing functions will cease to work. Click on the question Mark if you want to enable DHCP Option 82. This allows the device to inject Option 82 with Router Name information before forwarding the DHCP Request packet to a PepVPN peer, such that the DHCP Server can identify where the request originates from. https://www.peplink.com 67 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink DHCP Server DHCP Server Logging IP Range &
Subnet Mask Lease Time DHCP Server Settings When this setting is enabled, the DHCP server automatically assigns an IP address to each computer that is connected via LAN and configured to obtain an IP address via DHCP. The Pepwave routers DHCP server can prevent IP address collision on the LAN. Enable logging of DHCP events in the eventlog by selecting the checkbox. These settings allocate a range of IP addresses that will be assigned to LAN computers by the Pepwave routers DHCP server. This setting specifies the length of time throughout which an IP address of a DHCP client remains valid. Upon expiration of the lease time, the assigned IP address will no longer be valid and renewal of the IP address assignment will be required. DNS Servers This option allows you to input the DNS server addresses to be offered to DHCP clients. If Assign DNS server automatically is selected, the Pepwave routers built-in DNS server address (i.e., LAN IP address) will be offered. WINS Servers This option allows you to optionally specify a Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) server. You may choose to use the built-in WINS server or external WINS servers . When this unit is connected using SpeedFusion TM , other VPN peers can share this unit's built-in WINS server by entering this unit's LAN IP address in their DHCP WINS Server setting. Afterward, all PC clients in the VPN can resolve the NetBIOS names of other clients in remote peers. If you have enabled this option, a list of WINS clients will be displayed at Status>WINS Clients . BOOTP Check this box to enable BOOTP on older networks that still require it. Extended DHCP Option In addition to standard DHCP options (e.g., DNS server address, gateway address, subnet mask), you can specify the value of additional extended DHCP options, as defined in RFC 2132. With these extended options enabled, you can pass additional configuration information to LAN hosts. To define an extended DHCP option, click the Add button, choose the option to define and enter its value. For values that are in IP address list format, you can enter one IP address per line in the provided text area input control. Each option can be defined once only. https://www.peplink.com 68 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink DHCP Reservation This setting reserves the assignment of fixed IP addresses for a list of computers on the LAN. The computers to be assigned fixed IP addresses on the LAN are identified by their MAC addresses. The fixed IP address assignment is displayed as a cross-reference list between the computers names, MAC addresses, and fixed IP addresses. Name (an optional field) allows you to specify a name to represent the device. MAC addresses should be in the format of 00:AA:BB:CC:DD:EE . Press to create a new to remove a record. Reserved client information can be imported record. Press from the Client List , located at Status>Client List . For more details, please refer to Section 22.3. DHCP Relay Settings DHCP Relay Enter the address of the DHCP server here. DHCP requests will be relayed to it. DHCP Server IP Address DHCP requests from the LAN are relayed to the entered DHCP server. For active-passive DHCP server configurations, enter active and passive DHCP server IPs into the DHCP Server 1 and DHCP Server 2 fields. DHCP Option 82 This feature includes device information as relay agent for the attached client when forwarding DHCP requests from a DHCP client to a DHCP server. Device MAC address and network name are embedded to circuit ID and Remote ID in option 82. DHCP Relay Logging Check this box to log DHCP relay activity. https://www.peplink.com 69 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.2.2 Network Settings (Common Settings) Static Route Settings This table is for defining static routing rules for the LAN segment. A static route consists of the network address, subnet mask, and gateway address. The address and subnet mask values are in w.x.y.z format. The local LAN subnet and subnets behind the LAN will be advertised to the VPN. Remote routes sent over the VPN will also be accepted. Any VPN member will be able to route to Static Route the local subnet. Click Entries in this list will allow traffic to route to a different subnet that is connected to the LAN interface. Any traffic destined for a network/mask pair will be directed to the corresponding gateway instead of routed through WANs. to create a new route. Click to remove a route. A - Advanced feature, please click the button on the top right hand corner of the Static Route session to activate and configure Virtual Network Mapping to resolve network address conflict with remote peers. In case of a network address conflict with remote peers (i.e. PepVPN / IPsec VPN / IP Forwarding WAN are considered as remote connections), you can define Virtual Network Mapping to resolve it. Note: OSPF & RIPv2 settings should be updated as well to avoid advertising conflicted networks. For further details on virtual network mapping watch this video: https://youtu.be/C1FMdZCn3Z8 Virtual Network Mapping One-to-One NAT Every IP Address in the Local Network has a corresponding unique Virtual IP Address for NAT. Traffic originating from the Local Network to remote connections will be SNAT'ed and behave like coming from the defined Virtual Network. While traffic initiated by remote peers to the Virtual Network will be DNAT'ed accordingly. Many-to-One NAT The subnet range defined in Local Network will be mapped to a single Virtual IP Address for NAT. Traffic can only be initiated from local to remote, and these traffic will be NAT'ed and behaves like coming from the same Virtual IP Address. https://www.peplink.com 70 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WINS Server Settings Enable Check the box to enable the WINS Server. A list of WINS clients will be displayed at Status>WINS Clients . Enter any needed DNS proxy settings. Once all settings have been entered, click Save to store your changes. DNS Proxy Settings Enable To enable the DNS proxy feature, check this box, and then set up the feature at Network>LAN>DNS Proxy Settings . A from LAN/PPTP/SpeedFusion TM peers. Requests are forwarded to the DNS servers/resolvers defined for each WAN connection. originating requests enabled server serve proxy DNS DNS can be to DNS Caching This field is to enable DNS caching on the built-in DNS proxy server. When the option is enabled, queried DNS replies will be cached until the records TTL has been reached. This feature can improve DNS response time by storing all received DNS results for faster DNS lookup. However, it cannot return the most updated result for frequently updated DNS records. By default, DNS Caching is disabled. https://www.peplink.com 71 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Include Google Public DNS Servers When this option is enabled, the DNS proxy server will forward DNS requests to Google's public DNS servers , in addition to the DNS servers defined in each WAN. This could increase the DNS service's availability. This setting is disabled by default. Local DNS Records This table is for defining custom local DNS records. A static local DNS record consists of a host name and IP address. When looking up the host name from the LAN to LAN IP of the Peplink Balance, the corresponding IP address will be returned. To display the option to set TTL manually, click record. Click to create a new record. Click to remove a Domain Lookup Policy DNS proxy will look up the domain names defined here using only the specified connections. DNS Resolvers A Check the box to enable the WINS server. A list of WINS clients will be displayed at Network>LAN>DNS Proxy Settings>DNS Resolvers . This field specifies which DNS resolvers will receive forwarded DNS requests. If no WAN/VPN/LAN DNS resolver is selected, all of the WANs DNS resolvers will be selected. If a SpeedFusion TM peer is selected, you may enter the VPN peers DNS resolver IP address(es). Queries will be forwarded to the selected connections resolvers. If all of the selected connections are down, queries will be forwarded to all resolvers on healthy WAN connections. A - Advanced feature, please click the button on the top right-hand corner to activate. Finally, if needed, configure your Bonjour forwarding settings. Once all settings have been entered, click Save to store your changes. Bonjour Forwarding Settings Enable Check this box to turn on Bonjour forwarding. Bonjour Service Choose Service and Client networks from the drop-down menus, and then click to add the networks. To delete an existing Bonjour listing, click Bonjour Forwarding is supported on All Balance models, MAX 700, HD2, HD4
. https://www.peplink.com 72 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Drop-In Mode Drop-in mode (or transparent bridging mode) eases the installation of the Peplink Balance on a live network between the firewall and router, such that changes to the settings of existing equipment are not required. The following diagram illustrates drop-in mode setup:
Enable drop-in mode using the Setup Wizard. After enabling this feature and selecting the WAN for drop-in mode, various settings, including the WAN's connection method and IP address, will be automatically updated. When drop-in mode is enabled, the LAN and the WAN for drop-in mode ports will be bridged. Traffic between the LAN hosts and WAN router will be forwarded between the devices. In this case, the hosts on both sides will not notice any IP or MAC address changes. After successfully setting up the Peplink Balance as part of the network using drop-in mode, it will, depending on model, support one or more WAN connections. Some MediaFast units also support multiple WAN connections after activating drop-in mode, though a SpeedFusion license may be required to activate more than one WAN port. Please note the Drop-In Mode is mutually exclusive with VLAN. https://www.peplink.com 73 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Drop-in Mode Settings Enable Drop-in mode eases the installation of the Peplink Balance on a live network between the existing firewall and router, such that no configuration changes are required on existing equipment. Check the box to enable the drop-in mode feature. Please refer to Section 12, Drop-in Mode for details. WAN for Drop-In Mode Select the WAN port to be used for drop-in mode. If WAN 1 with LAN Bypass is selected, the high availability feature will be disabled automatically. Shared Drop-In IP A When this option is enabled, the passthrough IP address will be used to connect to WAN hosts (email notification, remote syslog, etc.). The Balance will listen for this IP address when WAN hosts access services provided by the Balance (web admin access from the WAN, DNS server requests, etc.). To connect to hosts on the LAN (email notification, remote syslog, etc.), the default gateway address will be used. The Balance will listen for this IP address when LAN hosts access services provided by the Balance (web admin access from the WAN, DNS proxy, etc.). Shared IP Address A Access to this IP address will be passed through to the LAN port if this device is not serving the service being accessed. The shared IP address will be used in connecting to hosts on the WAN (e.g., email notification, remote syslog, etc.) The device will also listen on the IP address when hosts on the WAN access services served on this device (e.g., web admin accesses from WAN, DNS server, etc.) WAN Default Enter the WAN router's IP address in this field. If there are more hosts in addition to the router on the WAN segment, click the button next to WAN Default Gateway and check https://www.peplink.com 74 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Gateway the I have other host(s) on WAN segment box and enter the IP address of the hosts that need to access LAN devices or be accessed by others. WAN DNS Servers Enter the selected WAN's corresponding DNS server IP addresses. A - Advanced feature, please click the button on the top right-hand corner to activate. 10.2.3 Port Settings To configure port settings, navigate to Network > Port Settings This section allows you to:
Enable or disable specific LAN ports Configure the negotiation speed of the LAN ports Configure the port type (Trunk or Access) Assign a VLAN to a LAN port (in Access mode) https://www.peplink.com 75 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.3 VPN 10.3.1 SpeedFusion Peplink Balance SpeedFusion TM Bandwidth Bonding is our patented technology that enables our SD-WAN routers to bond multiple Internet connections to increase site-to-site bandwidth and reliability. SpeedFusion securely connects one or more branch offices to your company's main headquarters or to other branches. The data, voice, and video communications between these locations are kept confidential across the public Internet. The SpeedFusion TM of the Peplink Balance is specifically designed for multi-WAN environments. With SpeedFusion, in case of failures and network congestion at one or more WANs, other WANs can be used to continue carrying the network traffic. Peplink Balance routers can bond all WAN connections bandwidth for routing SpeedFusion TM traffic. Unless all the WAN connections of one site are down, the Peplink Balance can keep the VPN up and running. Bandwidth bonding is enabled by default. To begin, navigate to Network > VPN > SpeedFusion and enter a Local ID and click save. https://www.peplink.com 76 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This device will be identified by other SpeedFusion Peers by this local ID. The following menus will appear:
SpeedFusion Profiles This table displays all defined profiles. Click the New Profile button to create a new profile for making a VPN connection to a remote unit via available WAN connections. Each pair of VPN connection requires its own profile. The local LAN subnet and subnets behind the LAN (defined under Static Route on the LAN Settings page) will be advertised to the VPN. All VPN members will be able to route to local subnets. Send All Traffic To This feature allows you to redirect all traffic to a specified PepVPN connection. Click the your connection and the following menu will appear:
button to select You could also specify a DNS server to resolve incoming DNS requests. Click the checkbox next to Backup Site to designate a backup SpeedFusion profile that will take over should the main PepVPN connection fail. PepVPN Local ID This feature allows you to change the local ID of a PepVPN connection. Click the connection and the following menu will appear:
button to select your https://www.peplink.com 77 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink After updating the local ID, click Save to store your changes. Link Failure Detection The bonded VPN can detect routing failures on the path between two sites over each WAN connection. Failed WAN connections will not be used to route VPN traffic. Health check packets are sent to the remote unit to detect any failure. The more frequently checks are sent, the shorter the detection time, although more bandwidth will be consumed. When Recommended (default) is selected, a health check packet is sent every five seconds, and the expected detection time is 15 seconds. Link Failure Detection Time When Fast is selected, a health check packet is sent every three seconds, and the expected detection time is six seconds. When Faster is selected, a health check packet is sent every second, and the expected detection time is two seconds. When Extreme is selected, a health check packet is sent every 0.1 second, and the expected detection time is less than one second. Peplink proprietary SpeedFusion TM uses TCP port 32015 and UDP port 4500 for establishing VPN connections. If you have a firewall in front of your Peplink Balance devices, you will need to add firewall rules for these ports and protocols to allow inbound and outbound traffic to pass through the firewall. Important Note https://www.peplink.com 78 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SpeedFusion: Prole Conguration Click the New Profile button, or click one of the existing profiles, and the following menus will appear:
A list of defined SpeedFusion connection profiles and a Link Failure Detection Time option will be shown. Click the New Profile button to create a new VPN connection profile for making a VPN connection to a remote Peplink Balance via the available WAN connections. Each profile is for making a VPN connection with one remote Peplink Balance. PepVPN Profile Settings This field is for specifying a name to represent this profile. The name can be any combination of alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, a-z), underscores (_), dashes (-), and/or non-leading/trailing spaces ( ). Click the packet on PepVPN WAN traffic. icon next to the PepVPN Profile title bar to use the IP ToS field of your data Name https://www.peplink.com 79 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Enable When this box is checked, this VPN connection profile will be enabled. Otherwise, it will be disabled. Encryption By default, VPN traffic is encrypted with 256-bit AES . If Off is selected on both sides of a VPN connection, no encryption will be applied. Authentication Select from By Remote ID Only , Preshared Key , or X.509 to specify the method the Peplink Balance will use to authenticate peers. When selecting By Remote ID Only , be sure to enter a unique peer ID number in the Remote ID field. Remote ID /
Pre-shared Key This optional field becomes available when Remote ID / Pre-shared Key is selected as the Peplink Balances VPN Authentication method, as explained above. Pre-shared Key defines the pre-shared key used for this particular VPN connection. The VPN connection's session key will be further protected by the pre-shared key. The connection will be up only if the pre-shared keys on each side match. When the peer is running firmware 5.0+, this setting will be ignored. Enter Remote IDs either by typing out each Remote ID and Pre-shared Key, or by pasting a CSV. If you wish to paste a CSV, click the setting. icon next to the Remote ID / Preshared Key Remote ID/Remote Certificate These optional fields become available when X.509 is selected as the Peplink Balances VPN authentication method, as explained above. To authenticate VPN connections using X.509 certificates, copy and paste certificate details into these fields. To get more information on a listed X.509 certificate, click the Show Details link below the field. Allow Shared Remote ID When this option is enabled, the router will allow multiple peers to run using the same remote ID. NAT Mode Check this box to allow the local DHCP server to assign an IP address to the remote peer. When NAT Mode is enabled, all remote traffic over the VPN will be tagged with the assigned IP address using network address translation. Remote IP Address / Host Names
(Optional) If NAT Mode is not enabled, you can enter a remote peers WAN IP address or hostname(s) here. If the remote uses more than one address, enter only one of them here. Multiple hostnames are allowed and can be separated by a space character or carriage return. Dynamic-DNS host names are also accepted. This field is optional. With this field filled, the Peplink Balance will initiate connection to each of the remote IP addresses until it succeeds in making a connection. If the field is empty, the Peplink Balance will wait for connection from the remote peer. Therefore, at least one of the two VPN peers must specify this value. Otherwise, VPN connections cannot be established. Click the icon to customize the handshake port of the remote Host (TCP) Cost Define path cost for this profile. OSPF will determine the best route through the network using the assigned cost. Default: 10 Data Port This field is used to specify a UDP port number for transporting outgoing VPN data. If Default is selected, UDP port 4500 will be used. Port 32015 will be used if the remote unit uses Firmware prior to version 5.4 or if port 4500 is unavailable. If Custom is selected, enter an outgoing port number from 1 to 65535. https://www.peplink.com 80 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click the icon to configure data stream using TCP protocol [EXPERIMENTAL]. In the case TCP protocol is used, the exposed TCP session option can be authorised to work with TCP accelerated WAN link. Bandwidth Limit Define maximum download and upload speed to each individual peer. This functionality requires the peer to use PepVPN version 4.0.0 or above. While using PepVPN, utilize multiple WAN links to reduce the impact of packet loss and get the lowest possible latency at the expense of extra bandwidth consumption. This is suitable for streaming applications where the average bitrate requirement is much lower than the WAN's available bandwidth. WAN Smoothing Forward Error Correction Off - Disable WAN Smoothing. Normal - The total bandwidth consumption will be at most 2x of the original data traffic. Medium - The total bandwidth consumption will be at most 3x of the original data traffic. High - The total bandwidth consumption depends on the number of connected active tunnels. Forward Error Correction (FEC) can help to recover packet loss by using extra bandwidth to send redundant data packets. Higher FEC level will recover packets on a higher loss rate link. The expected overhead of Low is 13.3% and High is 26.7%. Require peer using PepVPN version 8.0.0 and above. Receive Buffer Receive Buffer can help to reduce out-of-order packets and jitter, but will introduce extra latency to the tunnel. Default is 0 ms, which disables the buffer, and maximum buffer size is 2000 ms. Packet Fragmentation If the packet size is larger than the tunnel's MTU, it will be fragmented inside the tunnel in order to pass through. Select Always to fragment any packets that are too large to send, or Use DF Flag to only fragment packets with Don't Fragment bit cleared. This can be useful if your application does Path MTU Discovery, usually sending large packets with DF bit set, if allowing them to go through by fragmentation, the MTU will not be detected correctly. Use IP ToS A If Use IP ToS is enabled, the ToS value of the data packets will be copied to the PepVPN header during encapsulation. Latency Difference Cutoff A Traffic will be stopped for links that exceed the specified millisecond value with respect to the lowest latency link. (e.g. Lowest latency is 100ms, a value of 500ms means links with latency 600ms or more will not be used) A - Advanced feature, please click the button on the top right-hand corner to activate. To enable Layer 2 Bridging between PepVPN profiles, navigate to Network>LAN>*LAN Profile Name*
https://www.peplink.com 81 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Traffic Distribution This option allows you to select the desired out-bound traffic distribution policy:
Policy Bonding - Aggregate multiple WAN-to-WAN links into a single higher throughput tunnel. Dynamic latencies. Aggregates WAN-to-WAN links with similar Weighted Bonding
By default, Bonding is selected as a traffic distribution policy. Congestion Latency Level For most WANs, especially on cellular networks, the latency will increase when the link becomes more congested. Setting the Congestion Latency Level to Low will treat the link as congested more aggressively. Setting it to High will allow the latency to increase more before treating it as congested. Ignore Packet Loss Event By default, when there is packet loss, it is considered as a congestion event. If this is not the case, select this option to ignore the packet loss event. Disable Bufferbloat Handling Disable TCP ACK Optimization Packet Jitter Buffer Bufferbloat is a phenomenon on the WAN side when it is congested. The latency can become very high due to buffering on the uplink. By default, the Dynamic Weighted Bonding policy will try its best to mitigate bufferbloat by reducing TCP throughput when the WAN is congested. However, as a side effect, the tunnel might not achieve maximum bandwidth. Selecting this option will disable the bufferbloat handling mentioned above. By default, TCP ACK will be forwarded to remote peers as fast as possible. This will consume more bandwidth, but may help to improve TCP performance as well. Selecting this option will disable the TCP ACK optimization mentioned above. The default jitter buffer is 150ms, and can be modified from 0ms to 500ms. The jitter buffer may increase the tunnel latency. If you want to keep the latency as low as possible, you can set it to 0ms to disable the buffer. Note : If the Receive Buffer is set, the Packet Jitter Buffer will be automatically disabled. https://www.peplink.com 82 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 8.41 WAN Connection Priority WAN Connection Priority If your device supports it, you can specify the priority of WAN connections to be used for making VPN connections. WAN connections set to OFF will never be used. Only available WAN connections with the highest priority will be used. To enable asymmetric connections, connection mapping to remote WANs, cut-off latency, and packet loss suspension time, click the button. Peplink also published a whitepaper about Speedfusion which can be downloaded from the following url:
http://download.peplink.com/resources/whitepaper-speedfusion-and-best-practices-2019.pdf https://www.peplink.com 83 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.3.2 IPsec VPN Peplink Balance IPsec VPN functionality securely connects one or more branch offices to your company's main headquarters or to other branches. Data, voice, and video communications between these locations are kept safe and confidential across the public Internet. All Peplink products can make multiple IPsec VPN connections with Peplink routers, as well as Cisco and Juniper routers. Note that all LAN subnets and the subnets behind them must be unique. Otherwise, VPN members will not be able to access each other. All data can be routed over the VPN with a selection of encryption standards, such as 3DES, AES-128, and AES-256. To configure, navigate to Network > VPN >IPsec VPN . A NAT-Traversal option and list of defined IPsec VPN profiles will be shown. NAT-Traversal should be enabled if your system is behind a NAT router. Click the New Profile button to create new IPsec VPN profiles that make VPN connections to remote Peplink Balance, Cisco, or Juniper Routers via available WAN connections. To edit any of the profiles, click on its associated connection name in the leftmost column. https://www.peplink.com 84 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 85 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink IPsec VPN Settings Name Active This field is for specifying a local name to represent this connection profile. When this box is checked, this IPsec VPN connection profile will be enabled. Otherwise, it will be disabled. Two versions of the IKE standards are available:
IKE Version IKEv1 IKEv2 Connect Upon Disconnection of Remote Gateway IP Address /
Host Name Check this box and select a WAN to connect to this VPN automatically when the specified WAN is disconnected. To activate this function, click the option. button next to the Active Enter the remote peers public IP address. For Aggressive Mode , this is optional. Policy-based - (default) All the matched traffic as defined in Local Networks and Remote Networks will be routed to this IPsec connection, this cannot be overridden by other routing methods. IPsec Type Route-based - Outbound Policy rule is required to route traffic to this tunnel and comes with more flexibility to control how to route traffic compared to Policy-based. If you want to modify the traffic selector instead of using the default (0.0.0.0/0). Note : This option is only available for the following models:
Balance: 30 LTE/Pro, One/Two, 210/310 HW4 or above, 305/380 or above MediaFast X series Enter the local LAN subnets here. If you have defined static routes, they will be shown here. Using NAT, you can map a specific local network / IP address to another, and the packets received by remote gateway will appear to be coming from the mapped network / IP address. This allows you to establish IPsec connection to a remote site that has one or more subnets overlapped with local site. Two types of NAT policies can be defined:
One-to-One NAT policy : if the defined subnet in Local Network and NAT Network has the same size, for example, policy "192.168.50.0/24 > 172.16.1.0/24" will translate the local IP address 192.168.50.10 to 172.16.1.10 and 192.168.50.20 to 172.16.1.20. This is a bidirectional mapping which means clients in remote site can initiate connection to the local clients using the mapped address too. Many-to-One NAT policy : if the defined NAT Network on the right hand side is an IP address (or having a network prefix /32), for example, policy "192.168.1.0/24 >
172.168.50.1/32" will translate all clients in 192.168.1.0/24 network to 172.168.50.1. This is a unidirectional mapping which means clients in remote site will not be able to initiate a Local Networks https://www.peplink.com 86 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink connection to the local clients. Remote Networks Enter the LAN and subnets that are located at the remote site here. Authentication To access your VPN, clients will need to authenticate by your choice of methods. Choose between the Preshared Key and X.509 Certificate methods of authentication. Mode Choose Main Mode if both IPsec peers use static IP addresses. Choose Aggressive Mode if one of the IPsec peers uses dynamic IP addresses. Force UDP Encapsulation Pre-shared Key Remote Certificate
(pem encoded) Local ID For forced UDP encapsulation regardless of NAT-traversal, tick this checkbox. This defines the peer authentication pre-shared key used to authenticate this VPN connection. The connection will be up only if the pre-shared keys on each side match. Available only when X.509 Certificate is chosen as the Authentication method, this field allows you to paste a valid X.509 certificate. In Main Mode , this field can be left blank. In Aggressive Mode , if Remote Gateway IP Address is filled on this end and the peer end, this field can be left blank. Otherwise, this field is typically a U-FQDN. Remote ID In Main Mode , this field can be left blank. In Aggressive Mode , if Remote Gateway IP Address is filled on this end and the peer end, this field can be left blank. Otherwise, this field is typically a U-FQDN. Phase 1 (IKE) Proposal In Main Mode , this allows setting up to six encryption standards, in descending order of priority, to be used in initial connection key negotiations. In Aggressive Mode , only one selection is permitted. Phase 1 DH Group Phase 1 SA Lifetime This is the Diffie-Hellman group used within IKE. This allows two parties to establish a shared secret over an insecure communications channel. The larger the group number, the higher the security. Group 2 : 1024-bit is the default value. Group 5 : 1536-bit is the alternative option. This setting specifies the lifetime limit of this Phase 1 Security Association. By default, it is set at 3600 seconds. Phase 2 (ESP) Proposal In Main Mode , this allows setting up to six encryption standards, in descending order of priority, to be used for the IP data that is being transferred. In Aggressive Mode , only one selection is permitted. Phase 2 PFS Group Perfect forward secrecy (PFS) ensures that if a key was compromised, the attacker will be able to access only the data protected by that key. None - Do not request for PFS when initiating connection. However, since there is no valid reason to refuse PFS, the system will allow the connection to use PFS if requested by the remote peer. This is the default value. Group 2 : 1024-bit Diffie-Hellman group. The larger the group number, the higher the security. https://www.peplink.com 87 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Group 5 : 1536-bit is the third option. Phase 2 SA Lifetime This setting specifies the lifetime limit of this Phase 2 Security Association. By default, it is set at 28800 seconds. IPsec VPN on the Peplink Balance is specially designed for multi-WAN environments. For instance, if a user sets up multiple IPsec profiles for his multi-WAN environment and WAN1 is connected and healthy, IPsec traffic will go through this link. However, should unforeseen problems (e.g.,unplugged cables or ISP problems) cause WAN1 to go down, our IPsec implementation will make use of WAN2 and WAN3 for failover IPsec Status shows the current connection status of each connection profile and is displayed at Status > IPsec VPN . 10.3.3 GRE Tunnel Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) is a tunneling protocol that can encapsulate a wide variety of network layer protocols inside virtual point-to-point links over an Internet Protocol network. A GRE tunnel is similar to IPSec or PepVPN. To configure a GRE Tunnel, navigate to Network > VPN > GRE Tunnel . Click the New Profile button to create new GRE tunnel profiles that establish tunnel connections to remote tunnel endpoints via available WAN connections. To edit the profiles, click on its associated connection name in the leftmost column. https://www.peplink.com 88 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink GRE Tunnel Profile Settings This field is for specifying a name to represent this GRE Tunnel connection profile. When this box is checked, this GRE Tunnel connection profile will be enabled. Otherwise, it will be disabled. This field is for entering the remote GREs IP address This field is for specifying the tunnel source IP address. This field is for specifying the tunnel destination IP address This field is to select the subnet mask that is to be used for the GRE tunnel. Name Active Remote GRE IP Address Tunnel Local IP Address Tunnel Remote IP Address Tunnel Subnet Mask Connection Select the appropriate WAN connection from the drop-down menu. Remote Networks Input the LAN and subnets that are located at the remote site here. https://www.peplink.com 89 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.4 Outbound Policy Outbound policies for managing and load balancing outbound traffic are located at Network>Outbound Policy . Click the button beside the Outbound Policy box:
A selection menu will appear, giving you the choice between three different Outbound Policy Settings:
Outbound Policy Settings High Application Compatibility Outbound traffic from a source LAN device is routed through the same WAN connection regardless of the destination Internet IP address and protocol. This option provides the highest application compatibility. Normal Application Compatibility Outbound traffic from a source LAN device to the same destination Internet IP address will be routed through the same WAN connection persistently, regardless of protocol. This option provides high compatibility to most applications, and users still benefit from WAN link load balancing when multiple Internet servers are accessed. Custom Outbound traffic behavior can be managed by defining rules in a custom rule table. A default rule can be defined for connections that cannot be matched with any of the rules. The menu underneath enables you to define Outbound policy rules:
The bottom-most rule is Default . Edit this rule to change the devices default manner of controlling outbound traffic for all connections that do not match any of the rules above it. Under https://www.peplink.com 90 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink the Service heading, click Default to change these settings. To rearrange the priority of outbound rules, drag and drop them into the desired sequence. By default, Auto is selected as the Default Rule . You can select Custom to change the algorithm to be used. Please refer to the upcoming sections for the details on the available algorithms. To create a custom rule, click Add Rule at the bottom of the table. https://www.peplink.com 91 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Service Name This setting specifies the name of the outbound traffic rule. New Custom Rule Settings This setting specifies whether the outbound traffic rule takes effect. When Enable is checked, the rule takes effect: traffic is matched and actions are taken by the Pepwave router based on the other parameters of the rule. When Enable is unchecked, the rule does not take effect: the Pepwave router disregards the other parameters of the rule. Enable Click the drop-down menu next to the checkbox to apply a time schedule to this custom rule. This setting specifies the source IP address, IP network, MAC address or Grouped network for traffic that matches the rule. Source Destination This setting specifies the destination IP address, IP network, Domain name, SpeedFusion Cloud, PepVPN Profile or Grouped network for traffic that matches the rule. https://www.peplink.com 92 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink If Domain Name is chosen and a domain name, such as foobar.com , is entered, any outgoing accesses to foobar.com and *.foobar.com will match this criterion. You may enter a wildcard (.*) at the end of a domain name to match any host with a name having the domain name in the middle. If you enter foobar.*, for example, www.foobar.com , www.foobar.co.jp , or foobar.co.uk will also match. Placing wildcards in any other position is not supported. NOTE: if a server has one Internet IP address and multiple server names, and if one of the names is defined here, access to any one of the server names will also match this rule. This setting specifies the IP protocol and port of traffic that matches this rule. Via a drop-down menu, the following protocols can be specified:
Protocol and Port Any TCP UDP IP DSCP Alternatively, the Protocol Selection Tool drop-down menu can be used to automatically fill in the protocol and port number of common Internet services (e.g., HTTP, HTTPS, etc.) After selecting an item from the Protocol Selection Tool drop-down menu, the protocol and port number remains manually modifiable. This setting specifies the behavior of the Pepwave router for the custom rule. One of the following values can be selected (note that some Pepwave routers provide only some of these options):
Algorithm Weighted Balance Persistence Enforced Priority Overflow Least Used Lowest Latency Fastest Response Time For a full explanation of each Algorithm, please see the following article:
https://forum.peplink.com/t/exactly-how-do-peplinks-load-balancing-algorithmns-work/8059 Load Distribution Weight This is to define the outbound traffic weight ratio for each WAN connection. https://www.peplink.com 93 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink When No connections are available Terminate Sessions on Link Recovery This field allows you to configure the default action when all the selected Connections are not available. Drop the Traffic - Traffic will be discarded. Use Any Available Connections - Traffic will be routed to any available Connection, even it is not selected in the list. Fall-through to Next Rule - Traffic will continue to match next Outbound Policy rule just like this rule is inactive. This setting specifies whether to terminate existing IP sessions on a less preferred WAN connection in the event that a more preferred WAN connection is recovered. This setting is applicable to the Priority algorithms. By default, this setting is disabled. In this case, existing IP sessions will not be terminated or affected when any other WAN connection is recovered. When this setting is enabled, existing IP sessions may be terminated when another WAN connection is recovered, such that only the preferred healthy WAN connection(s) is used at any point in time. Expert Mode is available on some Pepwave routers for use by advanced users. To enable the feature, click on the help icon and click turn on Expert Mode . In Expert Mode, a new special rule, SpeedFusion TM Routes , is displayed in the Custom Rules table. This rule represents all SpeedFusion TM routes learned from remote VPN peers. By default, this bar is on the top of all custom rules. This position means that traffic for remote VPN subnets will be routed to the corresponding VPN peer. You can create custom Priority or Enforced rules and move them above the bar to override the SpeedFusion TM routes. Upon disabling Expert Mode, all rules above the bar will be removed. Algorithm: Weighted Balance This setting specifies the ratio of WAN connection usage to be applied on the specified IP protocol and port. This setting is applicable only when Algorithm is set to Weighted Balance . https://www.peplink.com 94 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The amount of matching traffic that is distributed to a WAN connection is proportional to the weight of the WAN connection relative to the total weight. Use the sliders to change each WANs weight. For example, with the following weight settings:
Ethernet WAN1: 10 Ethernet WAN2: 10 Wi-Fi WAN: 10 Cellular 1: 10 Cellular 2: 10 USB:
10 Total weight is 60 = (10 +10 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 10). Matching traffic distributed to Ethernet WAN1 is 16.7% = (10 / 60 x 100%. Matching traffic distributed to Ethernet WAN2 is 16.7% = (10 / 60) x 100%. Matching traffic distributed to Wi-Fi WAN is 16.7% = (10 / 60) x 100%. Matching traffic distributed to Cellular 1 is 16.7% = (10 / 60) x 100%. Matching traffic distributed to Cellular 2 is 16.7% = (10 / 60) x 100%. Matching traffic distributed to USB is 16.7% = (10 / 60) x 100%. https://www.peplink.com 95 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Algorithm: Persistence The configuration of persistent services is the solution to the few situations where link load distribution for Internet services is undesirable. For example, for security reasons, many e-banking and other secure websites terminate the session when the client computers Internet IP address changes mid-session. In general, different Internet IP addresses represent different computers. The security concern is that an IP address change during a session may be the result of an unauthorized intrusion attempt. Therefore, to prevent damages from the potential intrusion, the session is terminated upon the detection of an IP address change. Pepwave routers can be configured to distribute data traffic across multiple WAN connections. Also, the Internet IP depends on the WAN connections over which communication actually takes place. As a result, a LAN client computer behind the Pepwave router may communicate using multiple Internet IP addresses. For example, a LAN client computer behind a Pepwave router with three WAN connections may communicate on the Internet using three different IP addresses. With the persistence feature, rules can be configured to enable client computers to persistently utilize the same WAN connections for e-banking and other secure websites. As a result, a client computer will communicate using one IP address, eliminating the issues mentioned above. There are two persistent modes: By Source and By Destination . By Source:
The same WAN connection will be used for traffic matching the rule and originating from the same machine, regardless of its destination. This option will provide the highest level of application compatibility. By Destination:
The same WAN connection will be used for traffic matching the rule, originating from the same machine, and going to the same destination. This option can better distribute loads to WAN connections when there are only a few client machines. The default mode is By Source . When there are multiple client requests, they can be distributed
(persistently) to WAN connections with a weight. If you choose Auto in Load Distribution , the weights will be automatically adjusted according to each WANs Downstream Bandwidth which is specified in the WAN settings page). If you choose Custom , you can customize the weight of each WAN manually by using the sliders. https://www.peplink.com 96 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Algorithm: Enforced This setting specifies the WAN connection usage to be applied on the specified IP protocol and port. This setting is applicable only when Algorithm is set to Enforced . Matching traffic will be routed through the specified WAN connection, regardless of the health check status of the WAN connection. Outbound traffic can also be enforced to go through a specified SpeedFusion TM connection. Algorithm: Priority This setting specifies the priority of the WAN connections used to route the specified network service. The highest priority WAN connection available will always be used for routing the specified type of traffic. A lower priority WAN connection will be used only when all higher priority connections have become unavailable. Starting from Firmware 5.2, outbound traffic can be prioritized to go through SpeedFusion TM connection(s). By default, VPN connections are not included in the priority list. Configure multiple distribution rules to accommodate different kinds of services. Tip https://www.peplink.com 97 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Algorithm: Overow The traffic matching this rule will be routed through the healthy WAN connection that has the highest priority and is not in full load. When this connection gets saturated, new sessions will be routed to the next healthy WAN connection that is not in full load. Drag and drop to specify the order of WAN connections to be used for routing traffic. Only the highest priority healthy connection that is not in full load will be used. https://www.peplink.com 98 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Algorithm: Least Used The traffic matching this rule will be routed through the healthy WAN connection that is selected in Connection and has the most available download bandwidth. The available download bandwidth of a WAN connection is calculated from the total download bandwidth specified on the WAN settings page and the current download usage. The available bandwidth and WAN selection is determined every time an IP session is made. https://www.peplink.com 99 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Algorithm: Lowest Latency The traffic matching this rule will be routed through the healthy WAN connection that is selected in Connection and has the lowest latency. Latency checking packets are issued periodically to a nearby router of each WAN connection to determine its latency value. The latency of a WAN is the packet round trip time of the WAN connection. Additional network usage may be incurred as a result. Tip The roundtrip time of a 6M down/640k uplink can be higher than that of a 2M down/2M up link because the overall round trip time is lengthened by its slower upload bandwidth, despite its higher downlink speed. Therefore, this algorithm is good for two scenarios:
All WAN connections are symmetric; or A latency sensitive application must be routed through the lowest latency WAN, regardless of the WANs available bandwidth. https://www.peplink.com 100 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Algorithm : Fastest Response Time The Fastest response Time algorithm works as follows:
When a network session is created, the first outgoing packet of that particular session is duplicated to all the available WANs. When the first response is received from a remote server, any further traffic for this session will be routed over that particular WAN connection for the fastest possible response time. If any slower responses are received on other connections afterwards, they will be discarded. https://www.peplink.com 101 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.5 Inbound Access Inbound access is also known as inbound port address translation. On a NAT WAN connection, all inbound traffic to the server behind the Peplink unit requires inbound access rules. By the custom definition of servers and services for inbound access, Internet users can access the servers behind Peplink Balance. Advanced configurations allow inbound access to be distributed among multiple servers on the LAN. Important Note Inbound access applies only to WAN connections that operate in NAT mode. For WAN connections that operate in drop-in mode or IP forwarding, inbound traffic is forwarded to the LAN by default. 10.5.1 Servers The to settings Access>Servers . configure servers on the LAN are located at Network>Inbound Inbound connections from the Internet will be forwarded to the specified Inbound IP address(es) based on the protocol and port number. When more than one server is defined, requests will be distributed to the servers in the weight ratio specified for each server. To define a new server, click Add Server , which displays the following screen:
Enter a valid server name and its corresponding LAN IP address. Upon clicking Save after entering required information, the following screen appears. https://www.peplink.com 102 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink To define additional servers, click Add Server and repeat the above steps. 10.5.2 Services Services are defined at Network>Inbound Access>Services . At least one server must be defined before services can be added. Tip To define a new service, click the Add Service button, upon which the following menu appears:
https://www.peplink.com 103 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Services Settings This setting specifies whether the inbound service rule takes effect. Enable When Yes is selected, the inbound service rule takes effect. If the inbound traffic matches the specified IP protocol and port, action will be taken by the Peplink Balance based on the other parameters of the rule. When No is selected, the inbound service rule does not take effect. The Peplink Balance will disregard the other parameters of the rule. Service Name This setting identifies the service to the system administrator. Only alphanumeric and the underscore _ characters are valid. The IP Protocol setting, along with the Port setting, specifies the protocol of the service as TCP, UDP, ICMP, or IP. Inbound traffic that matches the specified IP Protocol and Port (s) will be forwarded to the LAN hosts specified by the Servers setting. IP Protocol Upon choosing a protocol, the Protocol Selection Tool drop-down menu can be used to automatically the port information of common Internet services (e.g. HTTP, HTTPS, etc.). After selecting an item from the Protocol Selection Tool drop-down menu, the protocol and the port number will remain manually modifiable. The Port setting specifies the port(s) that correspond to the service, and can be configured to behave in one of the following manners:
Any Port , Single Port , Port Range , Port Map , and Range Mapping Any Port : all traffic that is received by the Peplink Balance via the specified protocol is forwarded to the servers specified by the Servers setting. For example, if I P Protocol is set to TCP and Port is set to Any Port , then all TCP traffic will be forwarded to the configured servers. Single Port : traffic that is received by the Peplink Balance via the specified protocol at the specified port is forwarded via the same port to the servers specified by the Servers setting. For example, if I P Protocol is set to TCP , Port is set to Single Port, and Service Port is set to 80, then TCP traffic received on Port 80 will be forwarded to the configured servers via port 80. Port Port Range : traffic that is received by the Peplink Balance via the specified protocol at the specified port range is forwarded via the same respective ports to the LAN hosts specified by the Servers setting. For example, if IP Protocol is set to TCP , Port is set to Port Range, and Service Port set to 80-88, then TCP traffic received on ports 80 through 88 will be forwarded to the configured servers via the respective ports. Port Mapping : traffic that is received by the Peplink Balance via the specified protocol at the specified port is forwarded via a different port to the servers specified by the Servers setting. For example, if IP Protocol is set to TCP , Port is set to Port Mapping , Service Port is set to 80, and Map to Port is set to 88, then TCP traffic on port 80 is forwarded to the configured servers via port 88.
(Please see below for details on the Servers setting.) https://www.peplink.com 104 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Range Mapping : traffic that is received by Peplink Balance via the specified protocol at the specified port range is forwarded via a different port to the servers specified by the Servers setting. Inbound IP Address(es) This setting specifies the WAN connections and Internet IP address(es) from which the service can be accessed. This setting specifies the LAN servers that handle requests for the service, and the relative weight values. The amount of traffic that is distributed to a server is proportional to the weight value assigned to the server relative to the total weight. Included Server(s) Example:
With the following weight settings on a Peplink Balance:
demo_server_1: 10 demo_server_2: 5 The total weight is 15 = (10 + 5) Matching traffic distributed to demo_server_1:67% = (10 / 15) x 100%
Matching traffic distributed to demo_server_2:33% = (5 / 15) x 100%
UPnP / NAT-PMP Settings UPnP and NAT-PMP are network protocols which allow a computer connected to the LAN port to automatically configure the router to allow parties on the WAN port to connect to itself. That way, the process of inbound port forwarding becomes automated. When a computer creates a rule using these protocols, the specified TCP/UDP port of all WAN connections' default IP address will be forwarded. Check the corresponding box(es) to enable UPnP and/or NAT-PMP. Enable these features only if you trust the computers connected to the LAN ports. When the options are enabled, a table listing all the forwarded ports under these two protocols can be found at Network > Services > UPnP / NAT-PMP . https://www.peplink.com 105 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.5.3 DNS Settings The built-in DNS server functionality of the Peplink Balance facilitates inbound load balancing. With this functionality, NS/SOA DNS records for a domain name can be delegated to the Internet IP address(es) of the Peplink Balance. Upon receiving a DNS query, the Peplink Balance can return (as an A record) the IP address for the domain name on the most appropriate healthy WAN connection. It can also act as a generic DNS server for hosting A, CNAME, MX, TXT and NS records. The settings for defining the DNS records to be hosted by the Peplink Balance are located at Network > Inbound Access > DNS Settings . Note : DNS names may only contain alphanumeric characters (A-Z and 0-9), hyphens (-), and periods (.). The period is only allowed when it is used to delimit the components of domain style names. For more information, see the following websites:
r fc952 rfc1123 DNS Settings DNS Servers This setting specifies the WAN IP addresses on which the DNS server of the Peplink Balance should listen. If no addresses are selected, the inbound link load balancing feature will be disabled and the Peplink Balance will not respond to DNS requests. https://www.peplink.com 106 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink To specify and/or modify the IP addresses on which the DNS server should listen, click the button that corresponds to DNS Server , and a selection screen will be displayed:
To specify the Internet IP addresses on which the DNS server should listen, select the desired WAN connection then select the desired associated IP addresses. (Multiple items in the list can be selected by holding CTRL and clicking on the items.) Click Save to save the settings when configuration is complete. Zone Transfer This setting specifies the IP address(es) of the secondary DNS server(s)authorized to retrieve zone records from the DNS server of the Peplink Balance. Routing Control by Subnet Database Default SOA /
NS Default Connection Priority The zone transfer server of the Peplink Balance listens on TCP port 53. The Peplink Balance serves both the clients that are accessing from the specified IP addresses, and the clients that are accessing its LAN interface. When this function is enabled, the system will check to see if an incoming DNS client is within any WAN's ISP subnet. Only the matched WAN(s)'s IP addresses will be returned. Note that this feature is available only when a subnet database has been defined. Click the button to define a default SOA / NS record for all domain names. When defining a default SOA record, Name Server IP Address is optional. If left blank, the Address (A) record for the same server should be defined manually in each domain. For defining default NS records, the host [domain] indicates that this record is for the domain name itself without a sub-domain prefix. To add a secondary NS server, just create a second NS record with the Host field left empty. When the entered name server is a fully qualified domain name (FQDN), the IP Address field will be disabled. Default Connection Priority defines the default priority group of each WAN connection in resolving A records. It applies to Address (A) records which have the Connection Priority set to Default . Please refer to Section 17.3.9 for details. The WAN connection(s) with the highest priority (smallest number) will be chosen. Those with lower priorities will not be chosen in resolving A records unless the higher priority ones become unavailable. To specify the primary and backup connections, click the Default Connection Priority . A selection screen will appear. button that corresponds to Each WAN connection is associated with a priority number. Click Save to save the settings when configuration is complete. Domain name This section shows a list of domain names to be hosted by the Peplink Balance. Each domain can have its NS, MX and TXT records, and its sub-domains A and CNAME records. Add a new record by clicking the New Domain Name button. Click on a domain name to edit. Press the red X to remove a domain name. https://www.peplink.com 107 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink New Domain Name Upon clicking the New Domain Name button, and the following screen will appear:
This page is for defining the domains SOA, NS, MX, CNAME, A, TXT, and SRV records. Seven tables are presented in this page for defining the five types of records . https://www.peplink.com 108 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SOA Records Click on the icon to choose whether to use the pre-defined default SOA record and NS records. If the option Use Default SOA and NS Records is selected, any changes made in the default SOA/NS records will be applied to this domain automatically. Otherwise, select the option Customize SOA Record for this domain to customize this domain's SOA and NS records. This table displays the current SOA record. When the option Customize SOA Record for this domain is selected, you can click the link Click here to define SOA record to create or click on the Name Server field to edit the SOA record. In the SOA record, you have to fill out the fields Name Server , Name Server IP Address , Email , Refresh , Retry , Expire , Min Time , and TTL . Default values are set for SOA and NS records, Name Server IP Address: This is the IP address of the authoritative name server. An https://www.peplink.com 109 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink entry in this field is optional. If the Balance is the authoritative name server of the domain, this field's value should be the WAN connection's name server IP address that is registered in the DNS registrar. If this field is entered, a corresponding A record for the name server will be created automatically. If it is left blank, the A record for the name server must be created manually. E-mail : Defines the e-mail address of the person responsible for this zone. Note: format should be mailbox-name.domain.com , e.g., hostmaster.example.com . Refresh : Indicates the length of time (in seconds) when the slave will try to refresh the zone from the master. Retry : Defines the duration (in seconds) between retries if the slave (secondary) fails to contact the master and the refresh (above) has expired. Expire : Indicates the time (in seconds) when the zone data is no longer authoritative. This option applies to slave DNS servers only. Min Time : Is the negative caching time which defines the time (in seconds) after an error record is cached. TTL (Time-to-Live) : Defines the duration (in seconds) that the record may be cached. NS Records The NS Records table shows the NS servers and TTL that correspond to the domain. The NS record of the name server defined in the SOA record is automatically added here. To add a new NS record, click the New NS Records button in the NS Records box. Then the table will expand to look like the following:
When creating an NS record for the domain itself (not a sub-domain), the Host field should be left blank. Enter a name server host name and its IP address into the corresponding boxes. The host name can be a non-FQDN (fully qualified domain name). Please be sure that a corresponding A record is created. Click the button on the right to finish and to add other name servers. Click the Save button to save your changes. https://www.peplink.com 110 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink MX Records The MX Record table shows the domains MX records. To add a new MX record, click the New MX Records button in the MX Records box. Then the table will expand to look like the following:
When creating an MX record for the domain itself (not a sub-domain), the Host field should be left blank. For each record, Priority and Mail Server name must be entered. Priority typically ranges from 10 to 100. Smaller numbers have a higher priority. After finishing adding MX records, click the Save button. CNAME Records The CNAME Record table shows the domains CNAME records. To add a new CNAME record, click the New CNAME Records button in the CNAME Record box. Then the table will expand to look like the following:
When creating a CNAME record for the domain itself (not a sub-domain), the Host field should be left blank. The wildcard character *is supported in the Host field. The reference of ". domain.name " will be returned for every name ending with ". domain.name " except names that have their own records. https://www.peplink.com 111 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The TTL field tells the time to live of the record in external DNS caches. A Records This table shows the A records of the domain name. To add an A record, click the New A Record button. The following screen will appear:
A record may be automatically added for the SOA records with a name server IP address provided. A Record Host Name This field specifies the A record of this sub-domain to be served by the Peplink Balance. The wildcard character * is supported. The IP addresses of *.domain.name" will be returned for every name ending with ".domain.name" except names that have their own records. This setting specifies the time to live of this record in external DNS caches. TTL In order to reflect any dynamic changes on the IP addresses in case of link failure and recovery, this value should be set to a smaller value, e.g., 5 secs, 60 secs, etc. Priority This option specifies the priority of different connections. Select the Default option to apply the Default Connection Priority (refer to the table https://www.peplink.com 112 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink shown on the main DNS settings page) to an A record. To customize priorities, choose the Custom option and a priority selection table will be shown at the bottom. This setting specifies lists of WAN-specific Internet IP addresses that are candidates to be returned when the Peplink Balance responds to DNS queries for the domain name specified by Host Name . The IP addresses listed in each box as default are the Internet IP addresses associated with each of the WAN connections. Static IP addresses that are not associated with any WAN can be entered into the Custom IP list. A PTR record is also created for each custom IP. For WAN connections that operate under drop-in mode, there may be other routable IP addresses in addition to the default IP address. Therefore, the Peplink Balance allows custom Internet IP addresses to be added manually via filling the text box on the right-hand side and clicking the button. Only the checked IP addresses in the lists are candidates to be returned when responding to a DNS query. If a WAN connection is down, the corresponding set of IP addresses will not be returned. However, the IP addresses in the Custom IP Address field will always be returned. If the Connection Priority field is set to Custom , you can also specify the usage priority of each WAN connection. Only selected IP address(es) of available connection(s) with the highest priority, and custom IP addresses will be returned. By default, Connection Priority is set to Default . Included IP Address(es) PTR Records PTR records are created along with A records pointing to custom IPs. For example, if you created an A record www.mydomain.com pointing to 11.22.33.44 , then a PTR record 44.33.22.11.in-addr.arpa pointing to www.mydomain.com will also be created. When there are multiple host names pointing to the same IP address, only one PTR record for the IP address will be created. In order for PTR records to function, you also need to create NS records. For example, if the IP address range 11.22.33.0 to 11.22.33.255 is delegated to the DNS server on the Peplink Balance, you will also have to create a domain 33.22.11.in-addr.arpa and have its NS records pointing to your DNS servers (the Peplink Balances) public IP addresses. With the above records created, the PTR record creation is complete. https://www.peplink.com 113 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink TXT Records This table shows the TXT record of the domain name. To add a new TXT record, click the New TXT Record button in the TXT Records box. Click the Edit button to edit the record. The time-to-live value and the TXT records value can be entered. Click the Save button to finish. When creating a TXT record for the domain itself (not a sub-domain), the Host field should be left blank. The maximum size of the TXT Value is 255 bytes. After editing the five types of records, you can leave the page by simply going to another section of the web admin interface. https://www.peplink.com 114 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SRV Records To add a new SRV record, click the New SRV Record button in the SRV Records box. Service: The symbolic name of the desired service. Priority : Indicates the priority of the target; the smaller the value, the higher the priority. Weight : A relative weight for records with the same priority. Target : The canonical hostname of the machine providing the service. Port : Enter the TCP or UDP port number on which the service is to be found. Reverse Lookup Zones Reverse lookup zones can be configured in Network>Inbound Access>DNS Settings . Reverse lookup refers to performing a DNS query to find one or more DNS names associated with a given IP address. The DNS stores IP addresses in the form of specially formatted names as pointer (PTR) records using special domains/zones. The zone is in-addr.arpa . To enable DNS clients to perform a reverse lookup for a host, perform two steps:
Create a reverse lookup zone that corresponds to the subnet network address of the host. In the reverse lookup zone, add a pointer (PTR) resource record that maps the host IP address to the host name. Click the New Reverse Lookup Zone button and enter a reverse lookup zone name. If https://www.peplink.com 115 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink are delegated you be 33.22.11.in-arpa.add r. PTR records for 11.22.33.1, 11.22.33.2, ... 11.22.33.254 should be defined in this zone where the host IP numbers are 1, 2, ... 254 , respectively. 11.22.33.0/24 , subnet should Name Zone the the https://www.peplink.com 116 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SOA Record You can click the link Click here to define SOA record to create or click on the Name Server field to edit the SOA record. Name Server: Enter the NS record's FQDN server name here. For example:
"ns1.mydomain.com" (equivalent to "www.1stdomain.com.")
"ns2.mydomain.com."
Email, Refresh, Retry, Expire, Min Time, and TTL are entered in the same way as in the forward zone. Please refer to Section 17.3.5 for details. https://www.peplink.com 117 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink NS Records The NS record of the name server defined in the SOA record is automatically added here. To create a new NS record, click the New NS Records button. When creating an NS record for the reverse lookup zone itself (not a sub-domain or dedicated zone), the Host field should be left blank. Name Server must be a FQDN. CNAME Records To create a new CNAME record, click the New CNAME Record button. CNAME records are typically used for defining classless reverse lookup zones. Subnetted reverse lookup zones are further described in RFC 2317 , "Classless IN-ADDR.ARPA delegation."
https://www.peplink.com 118 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink PTR Records To create a new PTR record, click the New PTR Record button. For Host IP Number field, enter the last integer in the IP address of a PTR record. For example. zone where is 33.22.11.in-arpa.addr , the Host IP Number should be 44 . The Points To field defines the host name which the PTR record should be pointed to. It must be a FQDN. address 11.22.33.44 , reverse lookup the the for IP DNS Record Import Wizard At the bottom of the DNS settings page, the link Import records via zone transfer is used to import DNS record using an import wizard. Select Next >> to continue. https://www.peplink.com 119 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink In the Target DNS Server IP Address field, enter the IP address of the DNS server. In the Transfer via field, choose the connection which you would like to transfer through. Select Next >> to continue. In the blank space, enter the Domain Names (Zones) which you would like to assign the IP address entered in the previous step. Enter one domain name per line. Select Next >> to continue. Important Note If you have entered domain(s) which already exist in your settings, a warning message will appear. Select Next >>
to overwrite the existing record or << Back to go back to the previous step. https://www.peplink.com 120 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink After the zone records process have been fetched, the fetch results would be shown as above. You can view import details by clicking the corresponding hyperlink on the right-hand side. https://www.peplink.com 121 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 122 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.6 NAT Mappings The Peplink Balance allows the IP address mapping of all inbound and outbound NATed traffic to and from an internal client IP address. NAT mappings can be configured at Network>NAT Mappings . To add a rule for NAT mappings, click Add NAT Rule and the following screen will be displayed:
NAT Mapping Settings LAN Client(s) NAT Mapping rules can be defined for a single LAN IP Address , an IP Range , or an IP Network . https://www.peplink.com 123 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Address This refers to the LAN hosts private IP address. The system maps this address to a number of public IP addresses (specified below) in order to facilitate inbound and outbound traffic. This option is only available when IP Address is selected. Range The IP range is a contiguous group of private IP addresses used by the LAN host. The system maps these addresses to a number of public IP addresses (specified below) to facilitate outbound traffic. This option is only available when IP Range is selected. Network The IP network refers to all private IP addresses and ranges managed by the LAN host. The system maps these addresses to a number of public IP addresses (specified below) to facilitate outbound traffic. This option is only available when IP Network is selected. Inbound Mappings This setting specifies the WAN connections and corresponding WAN-specific Internet IP addresses on which the system should bind. Any access to the specified WAN connection(s) and IP address(es) will be forwarded to the LAN host. This option is only available when IP Address is selected in the LAN Client(s) field. Note 1: Inbound mapping is not needed for WAN connections in drop-in mode or IP forwarding mode. Note 2: Each WAN IP address can be associated to one NAT mapping only. This setting specifies the WAN IP addresses should be used when an IP connection is made from a LAN host to the Internet. Outbound Mappings Each LAN host in an IP range or IP network will be evenly mapped to one of each selected WAN's IP addresses (for better IP address utilization) in a persistent manner (for better application compatibility). Note 1: If you do not want to use a specific WAN for outgoing accesses, you should still choose default here, then customize the outbound access rule in the Outbound Policy section. Note 2: WAN connections in drop-in mode or IP forwarding mode are not shown here. Click Save to save the settings when configuration has been completed. Inbound firewall rules override inbound mapping settings. Important Note https://www.peplink.com 124 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.7 MediaFast MediaFast settings can be configured by navigating to Network > MediaFast . Setting Up MediaFast Content Caching To access MediaFast content caching settings, select Network > MediaFast . Enable Click the checkbox to enable MediaFast content caching. MediaFast Domains / IP Addresses Choose to Cache on all domains , or enter domain names and then choose either Whitelist (cache the specified domains only) or Blacklist (do not cache the specified domains). Source IP Subnet This setting allows caching to be enabled on custom subnets only. If "Any" is selected, then caching will apply to all subnets. https://www.peplink.com 125 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The Secure Content Caching menu operates identically to the MediaFast menu, except it is for secure content cachting accessible through https://. In order for Mediafast devices to cache and deliver HTTPS content, every client needs to have the necessary certificates installed*.
*See https://forum.peplink.com/t/certificate-installation-for-mediafast-https-caching/
Cache Control Content Type Check these boxes to cache the listed content types or leave boxes unchecked to disable caching for the listed types. Cache Lifetime Settings Enter a file extension, such as JPG or DOC. Then enter a lifetime in days to specify how long files with that extension will be cached. Add or delete entries using the controls on the right. Viewing MediaFast Statistics To get details on storage and bandwidth usage, select Status>MediaFast . https://www.peplink.com 126 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Prefetch Schedule Content prefetching allows you to download content on a schedule that you define, which can help to preserve network bandwidth during busy times and keep costs down. To access MediaFast content prefetching settings, select Network > MediaFast > Prefetch Schedule . https://www.peplink.com 127 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Name Status Next Run Time/Last Run Time Last Duration Prefetch Schedule Settings This field displays the name given to the scheduled download. Check the status of your scheduled download here. These fields display the date and time of the next and most recent occurrences of the scheduled download. Check this field to ensure that the most recent download took as long as expected to complete. A value that is too low might indicate an incomplete download or incorrectly specified download target, while a value that is too long could mean a download with an incorrectly specified target or stop time. Result This field indicates whether downloads are in progress (
) or complete (
). Last Download Check this field to ensure that the most recent download file size is within the expected range. A value that is too low might indicate an incomplete download or incorrectly specified download target, while a value that is too long could mean a download with an incorrectly specified target or stop time. This field is also useful for quickly seeing which downloads are consuming the most storage space. To begin a scheduled download immediately, click
. Actions To cancel a scheduled download, click To edit a scheduled download, click To delete a scheduled download, click
. New Schedule Click to begin creating a new scheduled download. Clicking the button will cause the following screen to appear:
https://www.peplink.com 128 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Simply provide the requested information to create your schedule. Clear Web Cache Click to clear all cached content. Note that this action cannot be undone. Clear Statistics Click to clear all prefetch and status page statistics. https://www.peplink.com 129 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.8 ContentHub ContentHub allows you to deliver webpages and applications to users connected to the SSID using the local storage on your router. Users will be able to access news, articles, videos, and access your web app without the need for internet access. The ContentHub can be used to provide infotainment to connected users on transport. ContentHub storage needs to be configured before content can be uploaded to the ContentHub. Click on the link on the information panel to configure storage. To access ContentHub, navigate to Network > ContentHub and check the Enable box.:
On an external server, configure content (a website or application) that will be synced to the ContentHub. For example, an html5 website. To configure a website or application as content, follow the steps below. Congure a website for the ContentHub This option allows you to sync a website to the Peplink router. This website will then be published with the specified domain from the router itself and makes the content available to the client via the HTTP/HTTPS protocol. Only FTP sync is supported for this type of ContentHub content. The content should be uploaded to an FTP server before you sync it with ContentHub. Click New Website and a window with the following configuration options will appear:
https://www.peplink.com 130 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Schedule Checking the box toggles the activation of the content. Select the type of content: Website or Application. Configure the protocol to be used: HTTP, HTTPS or both. Enter the URL for the ContenHub to use as the domain name for client access (such as http://mytest.com). Only applicable for Application type content. Choose between sync or file upload. Enter the details of the server that the content will be downloaded from. Enter credentials under Username and Password . This field determines how often the router will search for updates to the source content. Set a bandwidth limit for clients. Active Type Protocol Domain/Path Method Source Period Bandwidth Limit https://www.peplink.com 131 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click Save & Apply Now to activate the changes. A screenshot of the display after below:
configuration shown is The content will be synced regularly according to the time set in the Period that was configured earlier. If you want to activate the sync manually, you can click the icon. The Status column will display the sync progress. When the sync is completed, a summary will be displayed, as shown in the screenshot below:
To access the content, open a browser in the MFAs client and enter the domain details that were configured earlier (such as http://mytest.com ). Congure an application for the ContentHub MediaFast routers allow you to configure and publish any application from the router itself by using one of the supported frameworks below:
Python (version 2.7.12) Ruby (version 2.3.3) Node.js (version 6.9.2) Install the desired framework under Package Manager as shown below:
https://www.peplink.com 132 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink After installing the framework, change the Type to Application and configure the website. https://www.peplink.com 133 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The setting is the same as the Website type (refer to the description in the section above). Application type content need to be packed as explained below:
1. Implement two bash script files, start.sh and stop.sh in the root folder, to start and stop your application. The MediaFast router will only execute start.sh and stop.sh when the corresponding website is enabled and disabled respectively. 2. Compress the application files and the bash script to .tar.gz format. 3. Upload this tar file to the router. https://www.peplink.com 134 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink MDM Settings In addition to performing content caching, MediaFast-enabled routers can also serve as an MDM, administrating to client devices. To access MDM Settings, navigate to Network > MDM Settings :
Enable Account Settings MDM Settings Click this checkbox to enable MDM on your router. Click Follow Web Admin Account to allow client devices to use the built-in administrator account when performing MDM. Set Custom to specify a username and password your router will use to log into your client devices. Please refer to the knowledgebase for information about enrolling client devices to MDM:
https://forum.peplink.com/t/how-to-enroll-a-device-to-the-mdm-server/8454 Docker MediaFast enabled routers can host Docker containers when running Firmware 7.1 or later. Docker is an open platform for developing, shipping, and running applications. From Firmware version 7.1.0 and upwards, it is possible to install and run Docker Containers on your Peplink Mediafast 500 or 750 router. Due to the nature of Docker and its unlimited variables, this feature is supported by Pepwave up to the point of creating a running Docker Container. Information about Docker can be found on the Docker Documentation site:
https://docs.docker.com/ 2 This will allow you to run a file sharing platform (ownCloud), a web server (WordPress, Joomla!)
, a learning platform (Moodle), or a visualisation tool for viewing large scale data (Kibana). When creating a new Docker Container, the Pepwave router will search through the Docker Hub repository. https://hub.docker.com/explore/ 7 For detailed configuration instructions, refer to our knowledge base:
https://forum.peplink.com/t/how-to-run-a-docker-application-on-a-peplink-mediafast-router/1602 1 https://www.peplink.com 135 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink KVM MediaFast enabled routers now support KVM. Users will have to download and install Virtual Machine Manager to manage the KVM virtual machines. Through this, users are able to virtualise a Linux environment. For detailed configuration instructions, refer to our knowledge base articles:
1. How to install a Virtual Machine on Peplink/Pepwave - MediaFast/ContentHub Routers 2. How to Install Virtual Machine with USB storage on Peplink/Pepwave -
MediaFast/ContentHub Routers https://www.peplink.com 136 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.9 Captive Portal The captive portal serves as a gateway that clients have to pass if they wish to access the Internet using your router. To configure, navigate to Network > Captive Portal . Captive Portal Settings Enable Check Enable and then, optionally, select the LANs/VLANs that will use the captive portal. https://www.peplink.com 137 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Hostname To customize the portals form submission and redirection URL, enter a new URL in this field. To reset the URL to factory settings, click Default . Access Mode Click Open Access to allow clients to freely access your router. Click User Authentication to force your clients to authenticate before accessing your router. Select External Server to use the Captive Portal with a HotSpot system . As described in the following knowledgebase artic l e:
https://forum.peplink.com/t/using-hotspotsystem-wi-fi-on-pepwave-max-routers/
This authenticates your clients through a RADIUS server. After selecting this option, you will see the following fields:
RADIUS Server LDAP Server Fill in the necessary information to complete your connection to the server and enable authentication. This authenticates your clients through a LDAP server. Upon selecting this option, you will see the following fields:
Fill in the necessary information to complete your connection to the server and enable authentication. Access Quota Set a time and data cap to each users Internet usage. Quota Reset Time This menu determines how your usage quota resets. Setting it to Daily will reset it at a specified time every day. Setting a number of minutes after quota reached establish a timer for each user that begins after the quota has been reached. Inactive Timeout Allowed Networks Clients will get disconnected when the inactive the configured time is reached. Default 0: no timeout To whitelist a network, enter the domain name / IP address here and click
. To delete an existing network from the list of allowed networks, click the button next to the listing. https://www.peplink.com 138 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Allowed Clients To whitelist a client, enter the MAC address / IP address here and click
. To delete an existing client from the list of allowed clients, click the to the listing. button next Splash Page Here, you can choose between using the Balances built-in captive portal and redirecting clients to a URL you define. Popup Handling Configurable options for popup handling:
- Bypass Popup (Redirection only takes place on normal browser)
- Automatically show splash page on Safari for Apple (iOS / macOS) devices Logout Hostname A hostname that can be used to logout captive portal when being accessed on browser. Customize splash page Click on the provided link in the Captive portal profile to customize the splash page. A new browser tab is opened with a WYSIWYG editor of the splash page o edit the content, click on the corresponding element after switching Edit Mode to ON. https://www.peplink.com 139 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.10 QoS 10.10.1 User Groups LAN and PPTP clients can be categorized into three user groups - Manager, Staff, and Guest . This menu allows you to define rules and assign client IP addresses or subnets to a user group. You can apply different bandwidth and traffic prioritization policies on each user group in the Bandwidth Control and Application sections. The table is automatically sorted, and the table order signifies the rules' precedence. The smaller and more specific subnets are put towards the top of the table and have higher precedence; larger and less specific subnets are placed towards the bottom. Click the Add button to define clients and their user group. Click the defined rule. Two default rules are predefined and put at the bottom. They are All DHCP reservation clients and Everyone , reservation be client represents the LAN clients defined in the DHCP Reservation table on the LAN settings page. Everyone represents all clients that are not defined in any rule above. Click on a rule to change its group. button to remove the removed. cannot DHCP they The and All Add / Edit User Group Subnet / IP Address From the drop-down menu, choose whether you are going to define the client(s) by an IP Address or a Subnet . If IP Address is selected, enter a name defined in DHCP reservation table or a LAN client's IP address. If Subnet is selected, enter a subnet address and specify its subnet mask. Group This field is to define which User Group the specified subnet / IP address belongs to. Once users have been assigned to a user group, their internet traffic will be restricted by rules defined for that particular group. Please refer to the following two sections for details. 10.10.2 Bandwidth Control This section is to define how much minimum bandwidth will be reserved to each user group when a WAN connection is in full load . When this feature is enabled, a slider with two indicators will be shown. You can move the indicators to adjust each group's weighting. The https://www.peplink.com 140 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink lower part of the table shows the corresponding reserved download and uploads bandwidth value of each connection. By default, 50% of bandwidth has been reserved for Manager, 30% for Staff, and 20% for Guest. You can define a maximum download speed (over all WAN connections) and upload speed (for each WAN connection) that each individual Staff and Guest member can consume. No limit can be imposed on individual Managers. By default, download and upload bandwidth limits are set to unlimited (set as 0) . 10.10.3 Application You can choose whether to apply the same prioritization settings to all user groups or customize the settings for each group. Three priority levels can be set for application prioritization: High , Normal , and Low . The Peplink Balance can detect various application traffic types by inspecting the packet content. Select an application by choosing a supported application, or by defining a custom application manually. The priority preference of supported applications is placed at the top of the table. Custom applications are at the bottom. https://www.peplink.com 141 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Prioritization for Custom Application Click the Add button to define a custom application. Click the button to delete the custom application in the corresponding row. in the Action column When Supported Applications is selected, the Peplink Balance will inspect network traffic and prioritize the selected applications. Alternatively, you can select Custom Applications and define the application by providing the protocol, scope, port number, and DSCP value. Category and Application availability will be different across different Peplink Balance models. DSL/Cable Optimization DSL/cable-based download bandwidth. WAN connections have lower upload bandwidth and higher When a DSL/cable circuit's uplink is congested, the download bandwidth will be affected. Users will not be able to download data at full speed until the uplink becomes less congested. DSL/Cable Optimization can relieve such an issue. When it is enabled, the download speed will become less affected by the upload traffic. By default, this feature is enabled. https://www.peplink.com 142 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.11 Firewall A firewall is a mechanism that selectively filters data traffic between the WAN side (the Internet) and the LAN side of the network. It can protect the local network from potential hacker attacks, access to offensive websites, and/or other inappropriate uses. The firewall functionality of Peplink Balance supports the selective filtering of data traffic in both directions:
Outbound (LAN to WAN) Inbound (WAN to LAN) Internal Network (VLAN to VLAN) The firewall also supports the following functionality:
Intrusion detection and DoS prevention Web blocking With SpeedFusion TM enabled, the firewall rules also apply to VPN tunneled traffic. The Firewall function can be found at Network>Firewall 10.11.1 Access Rules The outbound firewall settings are located at Network>Firewall>Access Rules . Click Add Rule to display the following screen:
https://www.peplink.com 143 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The inbound firewall settings are located at Network>Firewall>Access Rules . Click Add Rule to display the following window:
The Internal Network firewall settings are located at Network>Firewall>Access Rules . Click Add Rule to display the following window:
https://www.peplink.com 144 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Inbound / Outbound / Internal Network Firewall Settings Rule Name This setting specifies a name for the firewall rule. This setting specifies whether the firewall rule should take effect. If the box is checked, the firewall rule takes effect. If the traffic matches the specified protocol/IP/port, actions will be taken by Peplink Balance based on the other parameters of the rule. Enable If the box is not checked, the firewall rule does not take effect. The Peplink Balance will disregard the other parameters of the rule. Click the dropdown menu next to the checkbox to place this firewall rule on a time schedule. WAN Connection
(Inbound) Protocol Select the WAN connection that this firewall rule should apply to. This setting specifies the protocol to be matched. Via a drop-down menu, the following protocols can be specified:
Any TCP UDP ICMP DSCP IP Alternatively, the Protocol Selection Tool drop-down menu can be used to automatically fill in the protocol and port number of common Internet services (e.g., HTTP, HTTPS, etc.) After selecting an item from the Protocol Selection Tool drop-down menu, the protocol and port number remains manually modifiable. Source and This specifies the source IP address(es) and port number(s) to be matched for the firewall https://www.peplink.com 145 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Port rule. A single address, or a network, can be specified as the Source IP & Port setting, as indicated with the following screenshots:
In addition, a single port, or a range of ports, can be specified for the Source settings. This specifies the destination IP address(es) and port number(s) to be matched for the firewall rule. A single address, or a network, can be specified as the Destination IP & Port setting, as indicated with the following screenshots:
Destination and Port In addition, a single port, or a range of ports, can be specified for the settings. This setting specifies the action to be taken by the router upon encountering traffic that matches the both of the following:
Action Source IP & port Destination IP & port With the value of Allow for the Action setting, the matching traffic passes through the router (to be routed to the destination). If the value of the Action setting is set to Deny , the matching traffic does not pass through the router (and is discarded). This setting specifies whether or not to log matched firewall events. The logged messages are shown on the page Status>Event Log . A sample message is as follows:
Aug 13 23:47:44 Denied CONN=Ethernet WAN SRC=20.3.2.1 DST=192.168.1.20 LEN=48 PROTO=TCP SPT=2260 DPT=80 Event Logging CONN: The connection where the log entry refers to SRC: Source IP address DST: Destination IP address LEN: Packet length PROTO: Protocol SPT: Source port DPT: Destination port Click Save to store your changes. To create an additional firewall rule, click Add Rule and repeat the above steps. To change a rules priority, simply drag and drop the rule:
Hold the left mouse button on the rule. Move it to the desired position. Drop it by releasing the mouse button. https://www.peplink.com 146 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink To remove a rule, click the button. Rules are matched from top to the bottom. If a connection matches any one of the upper rules, the matching process will stop. If none of the rules match the connection, the Default rule will be applied. The Default rule is Allow for Outbound, Inbound and Internal Network access. Tip If the default inbound rule is set to Allow for NAT-enabled WANs, no inbound Allow firewall rules will be required for inbound port forwarding and inbound NAT mapping rules. However, if the default inbound rule is set as Deny , a corresponding Allow firewall rule will be required. Intrusion Detection and DoS Prevention The Balance can detect and prevent intrusions and denial-of-service (DoS) attacks from the Internet. To turn on this feature, click
, check the Enable check box for the Intrusion Detection and DoS Prevention , and press the Save button. When this feature is enabled, the Balance will detect and prevent the following kinds of intrusions and denial-of-service attacks. Port scan o o o o o o NMAP FIN/URG/PSH Xmas tree Another Xmas tree Null scan SYN/RST SYN/FIN https://www.peplink.com 147 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SYN flood prevention Ping flood attack prevention https://www.peplink.com 148 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.11.2 Content Blocking Application Blocking Choose applications to be blocked from LAN/PPTP/PepVPN peer clients' access, except for those on the Exempted User Groups or Exempted Subnets defined below. Web Blocking Defines website domain names to be blocked from LAN/PPTP/PepVPN peer clients' access except for those on the Exempted User Groups or Exempted Subnets defined below. If "foobar.com" is entered, any web site with a host name ending in foobar.com will be blocked, https://www.peplink.com 149 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink e.g. www.foobar.com, foobar.com, etc. However, "myfoobar.com" will not be blocked. You may enter the wild card ".*" at the end of a domain name to block any web site with a host name having the domain name in the middle. If you enter "foobar.*", then "www.foobar.com",
"www.foobar.co.jp", or "foobar.co.uk" will be blocked. Placing the wild card in any other position is not supported. The device will inspect and look for blocked domain names on all HTTP and HTTPS traffic. Customized Domains Enter an appropriate website address, and the Peplink Balance will block and disallow LAN/PPTP/SpeedFusion TM peer clients to access these websites. Exceptions can be added using the instructions in Sections 21.2.1.4 and 21.2.1.5. You may enter the wild card ".*" at the end of a domain name to block any web site with a host name having the domain name in the middle. For example, If you enter "foobar.*," then
"www.foobar.com," "www.foobar.co.jp," or "foobar.co.uk" will be blocked. Placing the wild card in any other position is not supported. The Peplink Balance will inspect and look for blocked domain names on all HTTP traffic. Secure web (HTTPS) traffic is not supported. Exempted User Groups Check and select pre-defined user group(s) who can be exempted from the access blocking rules. User groups can be defined at QoS>User Groups section. Please refer to Section 20.1 for details. Exempted Subnets With the subnet defined in the field, clients on the particular subnet(s) can be exempted from the access blocking rules. URL Logging Click enable , and then enter the ip address and port (if applicable) where your remote syslog server is located. https://www.peplink.com 150 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.12 Routing Protocols 10.12.1 OSPF & RIPv2 The Peplink Balance supports OSPF and RIPv2 dynamic routing protocols. Click the Network tab from the top bar, and then click the Routing Protocols > OSPF & RIPv2 item on the sidebar to reach the following menu:
OSPF Router ID This field determines the ID of the router. By default, this is specified as the WAN IP address. If you want to specify your own ID, enter it into the Custom field. Area This is an overview of the OSPF areas that you have defined. Clicking on the name under Area allows you to configure the connection. To define a new area, click Add. To delete an existing area, click on the
. https://www.peplink.com 151 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink OSPF Settings Area ID Assign a name to be applied to this group. Machines linked to this group will send and receive related OSPF packets, while unlinked machines will ignore them. Link Type Choose the type of network that this area will use. Authentication If an authentication method is used, select one from this drop-down menu. Available options are MD5 and Text . Authentication key(s) may be input next to the drop-down menu after selecting an authentication method. Interfaces Select the interface(s) that this area will use to listen to and deliver OSPF packets. https://www.peplink.com 152 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink To access RIPv2 settings, click on
. RIPv2 Settings Authentication If an authentication method is used, select one from this drop-down menu. Available options are MD5 and Text . Authentication key(s) may be input next to the drop-down menu after selecting an authentication method. Interfaces Select the interface(s) that this area will use to listen to and deliver RIPv2 packets. OSPF & RIPv2 Route Advertisement PepVPN Route Isolation Network Advertising Static Route Advertising Isolate PepVPN peers from each other. Received PepVPN routes will not be forwarded to other PepVPN peers to reduce bandwidth consumption. . Networks to be advertised over OSPF & RIPv2. If no network is selected, all LAN / VLAN networks will be advertised by default. Enabling OSPF & RIPv2 Route Advertising allows it to advertise LAN static routes over OSPF
& RIPv2. Static routes on the Excluded Networks table will not be advertised. https://www.peplink.com 153 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.12.2 BGP Click the Network tab along the top bar, and then click the BGP item on the sidebar to configure BGP. Click the " x " to delete a BGP profile. Click " Add " to create a new BGP profile. BGP Name Enable This field specifies the name that represents this profile. When this box is checked, this BGP profile will be enabled. If it is left unchecked, it will be disabled. Interface The interface in which the BGP neighbor is located. Autonomous System The Autonomous System Number (ASN) assigned to this profile. Neighbor BGP Neighbors and their details. IP address The IP address of the Neighbor. Autonomous The Neighbor's ASN. https://www.peplink.com 154 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink System Multihop/TTL This field determines the Time-to-live (TTL) of BGP packets. Leave this field blank if the BGP neighbor is directly connected, otherwise you must specify a TTL value. This option should be used if the configured Neighbors IP address does not match the selected Interfaces network subnets. The TTL value must be between 2 to 255. Password
(Optional) Assign a password for MD5 authentication of BGP sessions. AS-Path Prepending:
AS path to be prepended to the routes received from this Neighbor. Values must be ASN and separated by commas. For example: inputting "64530,64531" will prepend "64530, 64531" to received routes. Hold Time Wait time in seconds for a keepalive message from a Neighbor before considering the BGP connection as stalled. The value must be either 0 (infinite hold time) or between 3 and 65535 inclusively. Default: 240 Next Hop Self Enable this option to advertise your own source address as the next hop when propagating routes. iBGP Local Preference This is the metric advertised to iBGP Neighbors to indicate the preference for external routes. The value must be between 0 to 4294967295 inclusively. Default: 100 BFD Enable this option to add Bidirectional Forwarding Detection for path failure. All directly connected Neighbors that use the same physical interface share the same BFD settings. All mulithop Neighbors share the same multihop BFD settings. You can configure BFD settings in the BGP profile listing page after this option is enabled. Network Advertising Static Route Advertising Route Advertisement Select the Networks that will be advertised to the BGP Neighbor. Enable this option to advertise static LAN routes. Static routes that match the Excluded Networks table will not be advertised. https://www.peplink.com 155 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Custom Route Advertising Advertise OSPF Route Additional routes to be advertised to the BGP Neighbor. When this box is checked, every learnt OSPF route will be advertised. Set Community Assign a prefix to a Community Community:
Two numbers in new-format. e.g. 65000:21344 Well-known communities:
no-export 65535:65281 no-advertise 65535:65282 no-export-subconfed 65535:65283 no-peer 65535:65284 Route Prefix:
Comma separated networks. e.g. 172.168.1.0/24,192.168.1.0/28 Route Import Settings Filter Mode This field allows for the selection of the filter mode for route import. None : All BGP routes will be accepted. Accept : Routes in "Restricted Networks" will be accepted, routes not in the list will be rejected. Reject : Routes in "Restricted Networks" will be rejected, routes not in the list will be accepted. Restricted Networks This field specifies the network(s) in the route import entry. Exact Match: When this box is checked, only routes with the same Network and Subnet Mask will be filtered. Otherwise, routes within the Networks and Subnets will be filtered. https://www.peplink.com 156 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Filter Mode This field allows for the selection of the filter mode for route export. None : All BGP routes will be accepted. Accept : Routes in "Restricted Networks" will be accepted, routes not in the list will be rejected. Reject : Routes in "Restricted Networks" will be rejected, routes not in the list will be accepted. Restricted Networks This field specifies the network(s) in the route export entry. Exact Match: When this box is checked, only routes with the same Network and Subnet Mask will be filtered. Otherwise, routes within the Networks and Subnets will be filtered. Export to other BGP Profile When this box is checked, routes learnt from this BGP profile will be exported to other BGP profiles. Export to OSPF When this box is checked, routes learnt from this BGP profile will be exported to the OSPF routing protocol. https://www.peplink.com 157 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.13 Remote User Access A remote-access VPN connection allows an individual user to connect to a private business network from a remote location using a laptop or desktop computer connected to the Internet. Networks routed by a Peplink router can be remotely accessed via OpenVPN, L2TP with IPsec or PPTP. To configure this feature, navigate to Network > Remote User Access and choose the required VPN type. 10.13.1 L2TP with IPsec L2TP with IPsec Remote User Access Settings Pre-shared Key Enter your pre shared key in the text field. Please note that remote devices will need this preshared key to access the Balance. Listen On This setting is for specifying the WAN IP addresses that allow remote user access. Disable Weak Ciphers Click the button to show and enable this option. When checked, weak ciphers such as 3DES will be disabled. Continue to configure the authentication method. 10.13.2 OpenVPN Select OpenVPN and continue to configure the authentication method. The OpenVPN Client configuration has been saved. profile can be downloaded from the Status > device page after the https://www.peplink.com 158 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink You have a choice between 2 different OpenVPN Client profiles:
Option 1: "Route all traffic" profile Using this profile, VPN clients will send all the traffic through the OpenVPN tunnel Option 2: "Split tunnel" profile Using this profile, VPN clients will ONLY send those traffic designated to the untagged LAN and VLAN segment through the OpenVPN tunnel. 10.13.3 PPTP No additional configuration required. The Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is an obsolete method for implementing virtual private networks. PPTP has many well known security issues Continue to configure authentication methods. 10.13.4 Authentication Methods Authentication Method Connect to Network Select the VLAN network for remote users to enable remote user access on. Authentication Determine the method of authenticating remote users User accounts:
This setting allows you to define the Remote User Accounts. Click Add to input username and password to create an account. After adding the user accounts, you can click on a username to edit the account password. Note:
The username must contain lowercase letters, numerics, underscore(_), dash(-), at sign(@), and period(.) only. https://www.peplink.com 159 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
1 2 3 | User Manua-2 | Users Manual | 4.86 MiB | October 27 2022 / April 27 2023 | delayed release |
The password must be between 8 and 12 characters long. LDAP Server:
Enter the matching LDAP server details to allow for LDAP server authentication. Radius Server:
Enter the matching Radius server details to allow for Radius server authentication. Active Directory:
Enter the matching Active Directory details to allow for Active Directory server authentication. 10.14 Misc. Settings 10.14.1 High Availability Peplink Balance supports high availability (HA) configurations via an open standard virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP, RFC 3768). In an HA configuration, two same-model Peplink Balance units provide redundancy and failover https://www.peplink.com 160 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink in a master-slave arrangement. In the event that the master unit is down, the slave unit becomes active. High availability will be disabled automatically where there is a drop-in connection configured on a LAN bypass port. The following diagram illustrates an HA configuration with two Peplink Balance units and two Internet connections:
In the diagram, the WAN ports of each Peplink Balance unit connect to the router and to the modem. Both Peplink Balance units connect to the same LAN switch via a LAN port. An elaboration on the technical details of the implementation of virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP, RFC 3768) by the Balance follows:
In an HA configuration, the two Peplink Balance units communicate with each other using VRRP over the LAN. The two Peplink Balance units broadcast heartbeat signals to the LAN at a frequency of one heartbeat signal per second. In the event that no heartbeat signal from the master Peplink Balance unit is received in 3 seconds (or longer) since the last heartbeat signal, the slave Peplink Balance unit becomes active. The slave Peplink Balance unit initiates the WAN connections and binds to a previously configured LAN IP address. At a subsequent point when the master Peplink Balance unit recovers, it will once again become active. You can configure high availability at Network>Misc. Settings>High Availability . Interface for Master Router Interface for Slave Router https://www.peplink.com 161 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink High Availability Enable Checking this box specifies that the Peplink Balance unit is part of a high availability configuration. Group Number This number identifies a pair of Peplink Balance units operating in a high availability configuration. The two Peplink Balance units in the pair must have the same Group Number value. Preferred Role This setting specifies whether the Peplink Balance unit operates in master or slave mode. Click the corresponding radio button to set the role of the unit. One of the units in the pair must be configured as the master, and the other unit must be configured as the slave. Resume Master Role Upon Recovery Configuration Sync. Master Serial Number This option is displayed when Master mode is selected in Preferred Role . If this option is enabled, once the device has recovered from an outage, it will take over and resume its Master role from the slave unit. This option is displayed when Slave mode is selected in Preferred Role . If this option is enabled and the Master Serial Number entered matches with the actual master unit's, the master unit will automatically transfer the configuration to this unit. Please make sure the LAN IP Address and the Subnet Mask fields are set correctly in the LAN settings page. You can refer to the Event Log for the configuration synchronization status. If Configuration Sync. is checked, the serial number of the master unit is required here for the feature to work properly. Virtual IP The HA pair must share the same Virtual IP . The Virtual IP and the LAN Administration IP must be under the same network. LAN Administration IP This setting specifies a LAN IP address to be used for accessing administration functionality. This address should be unique within the LAN. Subnet Mask This setting specifies the subnet mask of the LAN. Important Note For Balance routers in NAT mode, the virtual IP (VIP) should be set as the default gateway for all hosts sitting on the LAN segment. For example, a firewall sitting behind the Balance should set its default gateway as the virtual IP instead of the IP of the master Balance. https://www.peplink.com 162 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink In drop-in mode, no other configuration needs to be set. Please note that the drop-in WAN cannot be configured as a LAN bypass port while it is configured for high availability. https://www.peplink.com 163 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.14.2 Certicate Manager This section allows you to assign certificates for the local VPN, OpenVPN, Captive Portal, Mediafast, ContentHub, Wi-Fi WAN (Client and CA) and web admin SSL for extra security. Read the following knowledgebase article for full instructions on how to create and import a self-signed certificate:
https://forum.peplink.com/t/how-to-create-a-self-signed-certificate-and-import-it-to-a-peplink-pro duct/
https://www.peplink.com 164 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.14.3 Service Forwarding Service forwarding settings are located at Network>Misc. Settings>Service Forwarding . Service Forwarding SMTP Forwarding When this option is enabled, all outgoing SMTP connections destined for any host at TCP port 25 will be intercepted. These connections will be redirected to a specified SMTP server and port number. SMTP server settings for each WAN can be specified after selecting Enable . Web Proxy Forwarding DNS Forwarding in Web When this option is enabled, all outgoing connections destined for the proxy server These specified connections will be redirected to a specified web proxy server and port number. Web proxy interception settings and proxy server settings for each WAN can be specified after selecting Enable . Interception intercepted. Settings Proxy will be When this option is enabled, all outgoing DNS lookups will be intercepted and redirected to the built-in DNS name server. If any LAN device is using the DNS name servers of a WAN connection, you may want to enable this option to enhance the DNS availability without modifying the DNS server setting of the clients. The built-in DNS name server will distribute DNS lookups to corresponding DNS servers of all available WAN connections. In this case, DNS service will not be interrupted, even if any WAN connection is down. Custom Service Forwarding When custom service forwarding is enabled, outgoing traffic with the specified TCP port will be forwarded to a local or remote server by defining its IP address and port number. https://www.peplink.com 165 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SMTP Forwarding Some ISPs require their users to send e-mails via the ISPs SMTP server. All outgoing SMTP connections are blocked except those connecting to the ISPs. The Peplink Balance supports the interception and redirection of all outgoing SMTP connections (destined for TCP port 25) via a WAN connection to the WANs corresponding SMTP server. To enable the feature, select Enable under SMTP Forwarding Setup . Check Enable Forwarding for the WAN connection(s) that needs forwarding. Under SMTP Server , enter the ISPs e-mail server host name or IP address. Under SMTP Port , enter the TCP port number for each WAN. The Peplink Balance will intercept SMTP connections. Choose a WAN port according to the outbound policy, and then forward the connection to the SMTP server, if the chosen WAN has enabled forwarding. If the forwarding is disabled for a WAN connection, SMTP connections for the WAN will be simply be forwarded to the connections original destination. If you want to route all SMTP connections only to particular WAN connection(s), you should create a custom rule in outbound policy (see Section 16.1 ). Note Web Proxy Forwarding https://www.peplink.com 166 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink When this feature is enabled, the Peplink Balance will intercept all outgoing connections destined for the proxy server specified in Web Proxy Server Interception Settings . Then it will choose a WAN connection according to the outbound policy and forward the connection to the specified web proxy server and port number. Redirected server settings for each WAN can be set here. If forwarding is disabled for a WAN, then web proxy connections for that WAN will simply be forwarded to the connections original destination. DNS Forwarding When DNS forwarding is enabled, all clients outgoing DNS requests will also be intercepted and forwarded to the built-in DNS proxy server. Custom Service Forwarding After clicking the enable checkbox, enter your TCP port for traffic heading to the router, and then specify the IP Address and Port of the server you wish to forward to the service to. https://www.peplink.com 167 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.14.4 Service Passthrough Service passthrough settings can be found at Network>Misc. Settings>Service Passthrough . Some Internet services need to be specially handled in a multi-WAN environment. The Peplink Balance can handle these services such that Internet applications do not notice it is behind a multi-WAN router. Settings for service passthrough support are available here. Service Passthrough Support SIP Session initiation protocol, aka SIP, is a voice-over-IP protocol. The Peplink Balance can act as a SIP application layer gateway (ALG) which binds connections for the same SIP session to the same WAN connection and translate IP address in the SIP packets correctly in NAT mode. Such passthrough support is always enabled and there are two modes for selection: Standard Mode and Compatibility Mode . If your SIP servers signal port number is non-standard, you can check the box Define custom signal ports and input the port numbers to the text boxes. H.323 With this option enabled, protocols that provide audio-visual communication sessions will be defined on any packet network and passthrough the Balance. FTP FTP sessions consist of two TCP connections; one for control and one for data. In a multi-WAN situation, they must be routed to the same WAN connection. Otherwise, problems will arise in transferring files. By default, the Peplink Balance monitors TCP control connections on port 21 for any FTP connections and binds TCP connections of the same FTP session to the same WAN. If you have an FTP server listening on a port number other than 21, you can check Define custom control ports and enter the port numbers in the text boxes. TFTP The Peplink Balance monitors outgoing TFTP connections and routes any incoming TFTP data packets back to the client. Select Enable if you want to enable TFTP passthrough support. IPsec NAT-T This field is for enabling the support of IPsec NAT-T passthrough. UDP ports 500, 4500, and 10000 are monitored by default. You may add more custom data ports that your IPsec system uses by checking Define custom ports . If the VPN contains IPsec site-to-site VPN traffic, check Route IPsec Site-to-Site VPN and choose the WAN connection to route the traffic to. https://www.peplink.com 168 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.14.5 NTP Server Peplink routers can now serve as a local NTP server. Upon start up, it is now able to provide connected devices with the accurate time, precise UTC from either an external NTP server or via GPS and ensuring that connected devices always receive the correct time. NTP Server setting can be found via: Network>Misc. Settings>NTP Server Time Settings can be found at System>Time>Time Settings 10.14.6 Grouped Networks Using Grouped Networks you can group and name a range of IP addresses, which can then be used to define firewall rules or outbound policies. Start by clicking on add group then fill in the appropriate field. In this example well create a group accounting Click save when you have finished adding the required networks. The grouped network accounting can now be used to configure a group policy or firewall rule. https://www.peplink.com 169 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.14.7 Remote SIM Management Remote SIM management is accessible via Network > Misc Settings > Remote SIM Management . By default, this feature is disabled. Please note that a limited number of Pepwave routers support the SIM Injector, may refer to the link:
more details on FusionSIM Manual. https://www.peplink.com/products/sim-injector/
Appendix for or C Remote SIM Host Settings Remote SIM Host Settings Active LAN Discovery Check this box to enable Auto LAN discovery of the remote SIM server. https://www.peplink.com 170 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Remote SIM Host Enter the public IP address of the SIM Injector. If you enter IP addresses here, it is not necessary to tick the Auto LAN Discovery box above. You may define the Remote SIM information by clicking the Add Remote SIM . Here, you can enable Data Roaming and custom APN for your SIM cards. Add Remote SIM Settings SIM Server Add a new SIM Server SIM Server - Serial Number Enter the serial number of SIM Server SIM Server - Name This optional field allows you define a name for the SIM Server SIM Slot Click the drop-down menu and choose which SIM slot you want to connect. SIM Slot - Name This optional field allows you define a name for the SIM slot. https://www.peplink.com 171 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Data Roaming Enables data roaming on this particular SIM card. Operator Settings (for LTE//HSPA/EDGE/GPR S Only) This setting allows you to configure the APN settings of your connection. If Auto is selected, the mobile operator should be detected automatically. The connected device will be configured and connection will be made automatically. If there is any difficulty in making a connection, you may select Custom to enter your carriers APN, Username and Password settings manually. The correct values can be obtained from your carrier. The default and recommended setting is Auto. https://www.peplink.com 172 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.14.8 SIM Toolkit The SIM Toolkit can be found via Networks > Misc Settings > SIM Toolkit .This supports two functionalities, USSD and SMS. USSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD) is a protocol used by mobile phones to communicate with their service providers computers. One of the most common uses is to query the available balance. Enter your USSD code under the USSD Code text field and click Submit . You will receive a confirmation. To check the SMS response, click Get . After a few minutes you will receive a response to your USSD code https://www.peplink.com 173 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SMS The SMS option allows you to read SMS (text) messages that have been sent to the SIM in your Peplink router. https://www.peplink.com 174 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 11 AP Tab 11.1 AP 11.1.1 AP Controller Clicking on the AP tab will default to this menu, where you can view basic AP management options:
AP Management Support Remote AP AP Controller The AP controller for managing Pepwave APs can be enabled by checking this box. When this option is enabled, the AP controller will wait for management connections originating from APs over the LAN on TCP and UDP port 11753. It will also wait for captive portal connections on TCP port 443. An extended DHCP option, CAPWAP Access Controller addresses (field 138), will be added to the DHCP server. A local DNS record, AP Controller , will be added to the local DNS proxy. The AP controller supports remote management of Pepwave APs. When this option is enabled, the AP controller will wait for management connections originating from remote APs over the WAN on TCP and UDP port 11753. It will also wait for captive portal connections on TCP port 443. The DHCP server and/or local DNS server of the remote APs network should be configured in the DNS Proxy Settings menu under Network>LAN . The procedure is as follows:
1. Define an extended DHCP option, CAPWAP Access Controller addresses (field 138), in the DHCP server, where the values are the AP controller's public IP addresses; and/or 2. Create a local DNS record for the AP controller with a value corresponding to the AP controller's public IP address. https://www.peplink.com 175 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Sync. Method Select the required option to synchronize the managed APs. Options are:
As soon as possible (default) Progressively (synchronize APs in groups) One at a time (synchronize one AP at a time) Permitted AP Access points to manage can be specified here. If Any is selected, the AP controller will manage any AP that reports to it. If Approved List is selected, only APs with serial numbers listed in the provided text box will be managed. 11.1.2 Wireless SSID Current SSID information appears in the SSID section. To edit an existing SSID, click its name in the list. To add a new SSID, click Add . Note that the following settings vary by model. The below settings show a available by selecting the question mark in the top right corner). new SSID window with Advanced Settings enabled (these are https://www.peplink.com 176 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SSID Settings SSID Enable VLAN This setting specifies the SSID of the virtual AP to be scanned by Wi-Fi clients. Click the drop-down menu to apply a time schedule to this interface This setting specifies the VLAN ID to be tagged on all outgoing packets generated from this wireless network (i.e., packets that travel from the Wi-Fi segment through the Pepwave AP One unit to the Ethernet segment via the LAN port). The default value of this setting is 0 , which means VLAN tagging is disabled (instead of tagged with zero). Use of a VLAN pool is enabled by selecting the checkbox. Broadcast SSID This setting specifies whether or not Wi-Fi clients can scan the SSID of this wireless network. Broadcast SSID is enabled by default. Data Rate A Select Auto to allow the Pepwave router to set the data rate automatically, or select Fixed and choose a rate from the displayed drop-down menu. Multicast Filter A This setting enables the filtering of multicast network traffic to the wireless SSID. Multicast Rate A This setting specifies the transmit rate to be used for sending multicast network traffic. The selected Protocol and Channel Bonding settings will affect the rate options and values available here. IGMP Snooping A To allow the Pepwave router to listen to internet group management protocol (IGMP) network traffic, select this option. https://www.peplink.com 177 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink DHCP Relay Put the address of the DHCP server in this field.. DHCP requests will be relayed to this DHCP server DHCP Option 82 A If you use a distributed DHCP server/relay environment, you can enable this option to provide additional information on the manner in which clients are physically connected to the network. Layer 2 Isolation A Layer 2 refers to the second layer in the ISO Open System Interconnect model. When this option is enabled, clients on the same VLAN, SSID, or subnet are isolated to that VLAN, SSID, or subnet, which can enhance security. Traffic is passed to upper communication layer(s). By default, the setting is disabled. Maximum Number of Clients Indicate the maximum number of clients that should be able to connect to each frequency. To reduce 2.4 GHz band overcrowding, AP with band steering steers clients capable of 5 GHz operation to 5 GHz frequency. Choose between:
Band Steering Force - Clients capable of 5 GHz operation are only offered with 5 GHz frequency. Prefer - Clients capable of 5 GHz operation are encouraged to associate with 5 GHz frequency. If the clients insist to attempt on 2.4 GHz frequency, 2.4 GHz frequency will be offered. Disable - Default A - Advanced feature. Click the button on the top right-hand corner to activate. Security Settings This setting configures the wireless authentication and encryption methods. Available options:
Open ( No Encryption) Enhanced Open (OWE) WPA3 -Personal (AES:CCMP) WPA2/WPA3 -Personal (AES:CCMP) WPA2 -Personal (AES:CCMP) WPA2 Enterprise WPA/WPA2 - Personal (TKIP/AES: CCMP) WPA/WPA2 Enterprise Security Policy When WPA/WPA2 - Enterprise is configured, RADIUS-based 802.1 x authentication is enabled. Under this configuration, the Shared Key option should be disabled. When using this method, select the appropriate version using the V1 / V2 controls. The security level of this method is known to be very high. When WPA/WPA2- Personal is configured, a shared key is used for data encryption and https://www.peplink.com 178 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink authentication. When using this configuration, the Shared Key option should be enabled. Key length must be between eight and 63 characters (inclusive). The security level of this method is known to be high. NOTE:
When WPA2/WPA3- Personal is configured, if a managed AP which is NOT WPA3 PSK capable, the AP Controller will not push those WPA3 and WPA2/WPA3 SSID to that AP. Access Control Settings Restricted Mode The settings allow the administrator to control access using MAC address filtering. Available options are None , Deny all except listed , Accept all except listed and Radius MAC Authentication. MAC Address List Connections coming from the MAC addresses in this list will be either denied or accepted based on the option selected in the previous field. If more than one MAC address needs to be entered, you can use a carriage return to separate them. RADIUS Server Settings Host Enter the IP address of the primary RADIUS server and, if applicable, the secondary RADIUS server. Secret Enter the RADIUS shared secret for the primary server and, if applicable, the secondary RADIUS server. Authentication Port In the field, enter the UDP authentication port(s) used by your RADIUS server(s) or click the Default button to enter 1812 . Accounting In the field, enter the UDP accounting port(s) used by your RADIUS server(s) or click the https://www.peplink.com 179 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Port Default button to enter 1813 . NAS-Identifier Choose between Device Name , LAN MAC address , Device Serial Number and Custom Value Guest Protect Check this box to deny all connection attempts by private IP addresses. To create a custom subnet for guest access, enter the IP address and choose a subnet mask from the drop-down menu. To block access from a particular subnet, enter the IP address and choose a subnet mask from the drop-down menu. Block All Private IP Custom Subnet Block Exception Firewall Settings Firewall Mode The settings allow administrators to control access to the SSID based on Firewall Rules. Available options are Disable,Lockdown - Block all except... and Flexible -Allow all except... Firewall Exceptions Create Firewall Rules based on Port, IP Network, MAC address or Domain Name https://www.peplink.com 180 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 11.1.3 Wireless Mesh Wireless Mesh Support is available on devices running 802.11ac (Wi-Fi 5) and above. Along with the AP Controller, mesh network extensions can be established, which can expand network coverage. Note that the Wireless Mesh settings need to match the Mesh ID and Shared Key of the other devices on the same selected frequency band. To create a new Wireless Mesh profile, go to AP > Wireless Mesh , and click Add . Wireless Mesh Settings Mesh ID Enter a name to represent the Mesh profile. Frequency Select the 2.4GHz or 5GHz frequency to be used. Shared Key Enter the shared key in the text field. Please note that it needs to match the shared keys of the other APs in the Wireless Mesh settings. Click Hide / Show Characters to toggle visibility. 11.1.4 AP > Proles AP Profile Name Ap Profile name AP Settings https://www.peplink.com 181 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SSID You can select the wireless networks for 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz separately for each SSID. This drop-down menu specifies the national/regional regulations which the Wi-Fi radio should follow. If a North American region is selected, RF channels 1 to 11 will be available and the maximum transmission power will be 26 dBm (400 mW). If European region is selected, RF channels 1 to 13 will be available. The maximum transmission power will be 20 dBm (100 mW). NOTE: Users are required to choose an option suitable to local laws and regulations. Indicate the preferred frequency to use for clients to connect. Operating Country Preferred Frequency Important Note Per FCC regulation, the country selection is not available on all models marketed in the US. All US models are fixed to US channels only. AP Settings (part 2) Protocol This option allows you to specify whether 802.11b and/or 802.11g client association requests will be accepted. Available options are 802.11ng and 802.11na . By default, 802.11ng is selected. Channel Width Available options are 20 MHz , 40 MHz , and Auto (20/40 MHz) . Default is Auto (20/40 MHz), which allows both widths to be used simultaneously. Channel This option allows you to select which 802.11 RF channel will be utilized. Channel 1
(2.412 GHz) is selected by default. Auto Channel Update Output Power Client Signal Strength Threshold Indicate the time of day at which update automatic channel selection. This option is for specifying the transmission output power for the Wi-Fi AP. There are 4 relative power levels available Max , High , Mid , and Low . The actual output power will be bound by the regulatory limits of the selected country. Clients with signal strength lower than this value will not be allowed to connect. https://www.peplink.com 182 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Maximum number of clients This setting determines the maximum number of clients that can connect to this Wi-Fi frequency. Advanced Wi-Fi AP settings can be displayed by clicking the on the top right-hand corner of the Wi-Fi AP Settings section, which can be found at AP>Settings . Other models will display a separate section called Wi-Fi AP Advanced Settings , which can be found at Advanced>Wi-Fi Settings . Advanced AP Settings Management VLAN ID Operating Schedule This field specifies the VLAN ID to tag to management traffic, such as communication traffic between the AP and the AP Controller. The value is zero by default, which means that no VLAN tagging will be applied. NOTE: Change this value with caution as alterations may result in loss of connection to the AP Controller. Choose from the schedules that you have defined in System>Schedule. Select the schedule for the integrated AP to follow from the drop-down menu. Beacon Rate A This option is for setting the transmit bit rate for sending a beacon. By default, 1Mbps is selected. Beacon Interval A This option is for setting the time interval between each beacon. By default, 100ms is selected. DTIM A This field allows you to set the frequency for the beacon to include delivery traffic indication messages. The interval is measured in milliseconds. The default value is set to 1 ms . RTS Threshold A The RTS (Request to Clear) threshold determines the level of connection required before the AP starts sending data. The recommended standard of the RTS threshold is around 500. https://www.peplink.com 183 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Fragmentation Threshold A Distance / Time Convertor This setting determines the maximum size of a packet before it gets fragmented into multiple pieces. Select the range you wish to cover with your Wi-Fi, and the router will make recommendations for the Slot Time and ACK Timeout. Slot Time A This field is for specifying the unit wait time before transmitting a packet. By default, this field is set to 9 s . ACK Timeout A This field is for setting the wait time to receive an acknowledgement packet before performing a retransmission. By default, this field is set to 48 s . Frame Aggregation A This option allows you to enable frame aggregation to increase transmission throughput. A - Advanced feature, please click the button on the top right-hand corner to activate. Enable Web Access Protocol Management Port HTTP to HTTPS redirection Admin Username Admin Password Web Administration Settings Ticking this box enables web admin access for APs located on the WAN. Determines whether the web admin portal can be accessed through HTTP or HTTPS Determines the port at which the management UI can be accessed. Redirects HTTP request to HTTPS Determines the username to be used for logging into the web admin portal Determines the password for the web admin portal on external AP. https://www.peplink.com 184 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 11.2 AP Controller Status 11.2.1 Info A comprehensive overview of your AP can be accessed by navigating to AP > Info . AP Controller License Limit This field displays the maximum number of AP your Balance router can control. You can purchase licenses to increase the number of AP you can manage. Frequency Underneath, there are two check boxes labeled 2.4 Ghz and 5 Ghz . Clicking either box will toggle the display of information for that frequency. By default, the graphs display the number of clients and data usage for both 2.4GHz and 5 GHz frequencies. SSID The colored boxes indicate the SSID to display information for. Clicking any colored box will toggle the display of information for that SSID. By default, all the graphs show information for all SSIDs. No. of APs This pie chart and table indicates how many APs are online and how many are offline. No.of Clients This graph displays the number of clients connected to each network at any given time. Mouse over any line on the graph to see how many clients connected to a specific SSID for that point in time. https://www.peplink.com 185 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Data Usage This graph enables you to see the data usage of any SSID for any given time period. Mouse over any line on the graph to see the data usage by each SSID for that point in time. Use the buttons next to Zoom to select the time scale you wish to view. In addition, you could use the sliders at the bottom to further refine your timescale. 11.2.2 Access Points (Usage) A detailed breakdown of data usage for each AP is available at AP> Access Point . Usage AP Name/Serial Number This field enables you to quickly find your device if you know its name or serial number. Fill in the field to begin searching. Partial names and serial numbers are supported. Online Status This button toggles whether your search will include offline devices. This table shows the detailed information on each AP, including channel, number of clients, upload traffic, and download traffic. Click the blue arrows at the left of the table to expand and collapse information on each device group. You could also expand and collapse all groups by using the buttons. On the right of the table, you will see the following icons:
. Click the icon to see a usage table for each client:
Managed Wireless Devices Click the icon to configure each client https://www.peplink.com 186 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink For easier network management, you can give each client a name and designate its location. You can also designate which firmware pack (if any) this client will follow, as well as the channels on which the client will broadcast. Click the icon to see a graph displaying usage:
Click any point in the graphs to display detailed usage and client information for that device, using that SSID, at that point in time. On the Data Usage by menu, you can display the information by SSID or by AP send/receive rate. Click the Event tab next to Wireless Usage to view a detailed event log for that particular device:
https://www.peplink.com 187 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 188 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 11.2.3 Wireless SSID In-depth wireless SSID reports are available under AP > Wireless SSID . Click the blue arrow on any SSID to obtain more detailed usage information on each SSID. 11.2.4 Wireless Client You can search for specific Wi-Fi users by navigating to AP > Wireless Client . Here, you will be able to see your networks heaviest users as well as search for specific users. icon for additional details about Click the each user:
icon to bookmark specific users, and click the https://www.peplink.com 189 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 190 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 11.2.5 Mesh / WDS Mesh / WDS allows you to monitor the status of your wireless distribution system (WDS) or Mesh, and track activity by MAC address by navigating to AP > Controller Status > Mesh /
WDS . This table shows the detailed information of each AP, including protocol, transmit rate
(sent / received), signal strength, and duration. https://www.peplink.com 191 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 11.2.6 Nearby Device A listing of near devices can be accessed by navigating to AP > Controller Status > Nearby Device . Hovering over the device MAC address will result in a popup with information on how this device was detected. Click the icons and the device will be moved to the bottom table of identified devices. Nearby Devices 11.2.7 Event Log You can access the AP Controller Event log by navigating to AP > Controller Status > Event Log . https://www.peplink.com 192 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This event log displays all activity on your AP network, down to the client level. Use to filter box to search by MAC address, SSID, AP Serial Number, or AP Profile name. Click View Alerts to see only alerts, and click the More link for additional records. Events 11.3 Toolbox Additional tools for managing firmware packs, power adjustment, and channel assignment can be found at AP>Toolbox . Firmware Packs This is the first menu that will appear. Here, you can manage the firmware of your AP. Clicking on will display information regarding each firmware pack. To receive new firmware packs, you can either press to download new packs or you can press define which firmware pack is default. to manually upload a firmware pack. Press to https://www.peplink.com 193 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12 System Tab 12.1 System 12.1.1 Admin Security There are two types of user accounts available for accessing the web admin: admin and user . They represent two user levels: the admin level has full administrative access, while the user level is read-only. The user level can access only the device's status information; users cannot make any changes on the device. A web login session will be logged out automatically when it has been idle longer than the Web Session Timeout . Before the session expires, you may click the Logout button in the web admin to exit the session. 0 hours 0 minutes signifies an unlimited session time. This setting should be used only in special situations, as it will lower the system security level if users do not log out before closing the browser. The default is 4 hours, 0 minutes. For security reasons, after logging in to the web admin Interface for the first time, it is recommended to change the administrator password. Configuring the administration interface to be accessible only from the LAN can further improve system security. Administrative settings configuration is located at System>Admin Security . https://www.peplink.com 194 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Router Name This field allows you to define a name for this Pepwave router. By default, Router Name is set as MAX_XXXX , where XXXX refers to the last 4 digits of the units serial number. Admin Settings Admin User Name Admin Password Confirm Admin Password Read-only User Name Admin User Name is set as admin by default, but can be changed, if desired. This field allows you to specify a new administrator password. This field allows you to verify and confirm the new administrator password. Read-only User Name is set as user by default, but can be changed, if desired. User Password This field allows you to specify a new user password. Once the user password is set, the read-only user feature will be enabled. https://www.peplink.com 195 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Confirm User Password This field allows you to verify and confirm the new user password. Web Session Timeout This field specifies the number of hours and minutes that a web session can remain idle before the Pepwave router terminates its access to the web admin interface. By default, it is set to 4 hours . Authentication by RADIUS With this box is checked, the web admin will authenticate using an external RADIUS server. Authenticated users are treated as either "admin" with full read-write permission or user with read-only access. Local admin and user accounts will be disabled. When the device is not able to communicate with the external RADIUS server, local accounts will be enabled again for emergency access. Additional authentication options will be available once this box is checked. Auth Protocol This specifies the authentication protocol used. Available options are MS-CHAP v2 and PAP . Auth Server Auth Server Secret This specifies the access address and port of the external RADIUS server. This field is for entering the secret key for accessing the RADIUS server. Auth Timeout This option specifies the time value for authentication timeout. Accounting Server Accounting Server Secret Network Connection CLI SSH CLI SSH Access This specifies the access address and port of the external accounting server. This field is for entering the secret key for accessing the accounting server. This option is for specifying the network connection to be used for authentication. Users can choose from LAN, WAN, and VPN connections. The CLI (command line interface) can be accessed via SSH. This field enables CLI support. For additional information regarding CLI, please refer to Section 15.3. This menu allows you to choose between granting access to LAN and WAN clients, or to LAN clients only. CLI SSH Port This field determines the port on which clients can access CLI SSH. CLI SSH Login Grace Time CLI SSH Access Public Key This option specifies the time for CLI SSH login. The default value is 120. This field is for entering the Public Key for Admin Users and Read-only Users to access CLI SSH. Security This option is for specifying the protocol(s) through which the web admin interface can be accessed:
HTTP https://www.peplink.com 196 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink HTTPS HTTP/HTTPS HTTP to HTTPS redirection is enabled by default to force HTTPS access to the web admin interface. This field is for specifying the port number on which the web admin interface can be accessed. This option is for specifying the network interfaces through which the web admin interface can be accessed:
LAN only LAN/WAN If LAN/WAN is chosen, the WAN Connection Access Settings form will be displayed. Web Admin Port Web Admin Access LAN Connection Access Settings Allowed LAN Networks This field allows you to permit only specific networks or VLANs to access the Web UI. Allowed Source IP Subnets WAN Connection Access Settings This field allows you to restrict web admin access only from defined IP subnets. Any - Allow web admin accesses to be from anywhere, without IP address restriction. Allow access from the following IP subnets only - Restrict web admin access only from the defined IP subnets. When this is chosen, a text input area will be displayed beneath:
The allowed IP subnet addresses should be entered into this text area. Each IP subnet must be in form of w.x.y.z/m , where w.x.y.z is an IP address (e.g., 192.168.0.0 ), and m is https://www.peplink.com 197 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink the subnet mask in CIDR format, which is between 0 and 32 inclusively (For example, 192.168.0.0/24 ). To define multiple subnets, separate each IP subnet one in a line. For example:
192.168.0.0/24 10.8.0.0/16 This is to choose which WAN IP address(es) the web server should listen on. Allowed WAN IP Address(es) 12.1.2 Firmware Upgrading firmware can be done in one of three ways. Using the routers interface to automatically check for an update, using the routers interface to manually upgrade the firmware, or using InControl2 to push an upgrade to a router. The automatic upgrade can be done from System > Firmware . If an update is found the buttons will change to allow you to Download and Update the firmware. Click on the Download and Upgrade button. A prompt will be displayed advising to download the Current Active Configuration. Please click on the underlined download text. After downloading the current config click the Ok button to start the upgrade process. The router will download and then apply the firmware. The time that this process takes will depend on your internet connections speed. The firmware will now be applied to the router*. The amount of time it takes for the firmware to upgrade will also depend on the router thats being upgraded. https://www.peplink.com 198 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
*Upgrading the firmware will cause the router to reboot. Web admin interface: install updates manually In some cases, a special build may be provided via a ticket or it may be found in the forum. Upgrading to the special build can be done using this method, or using IC2 if you are using that to manage your firmware upgrades. A manual upgrade using the GA firmware posted on the site may also be recommended or required for a couple of reasons. All of the Peplink/Pepwave GA firmware can be found here Navigate to the relevant product line
(ie. Balance, Max, FusionHub, SOHO, etc). Some product lines may have a dropdown that lists all of the products in that product line. Here is a screenshot from the Balance line. If the device has more than one firmware version the current hardware revision will be required to know what firmware to download. Navigate to System > Firmware and click the Choose File button under the Manual Firmware Upgrade section. Navigate to the location that the firmware was downloaded to select the .img file and click the Open button. Click on the Manual Upgrade button to start the upgrade process. A prompt will be displayed advising to download the Current Active Configuration. Please click on the underlined download text. After downloading the current config click the Ok button to https://www.peplink.com 199 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink start the upgrade process. The firmware will now be applied to the router*. The amount of time it takes for the firmware to upgrade will depend on the router thats being upgraded.
*Upgrading the firmware will cause the router to reboot. The InControl method Described in this knowledgebase article on our forum. 12.1.3 Time The time server functionality enables the system clock of the Peplink Balance to be synchronized with a specified time server. The settings for time server configuration are located at System>Time . Time Settings Time Zone This specifies the time zone (along with the corresponding Daylight Savings Time scheme) in which Peplink Balance operates. The Time Zone value affects the time stamps in the event log of the Peplink Balance and e-mail notifications. Check Show all to show all time zone options. Time Server This setting specifies the NTP network time server to be utilized by the Peplink Balance. 12.1.4 Schedule Enable and disable different functions (such as WAN connections, outbound policy, and firewalls at different times, based on a user-scheduled configuration profile. The settings for this are https://www.peplink.com 200 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink located at System > Schedule Enable scheduling, and then click on your schedule name or on the New Schedule button to begin. Edit Schedule Profile Enabling Click this checkbox to enable this schedule profile. Note that if this is disabled, then any associated features will also have their scheduling disabled. Name Enter your desired name for this particular schedule profile. Schedule Click the drop-down menu to choose pre-defined schedules as your starting point. Please note that upon selection, previous changes on the schedule map will be deleted. Schedule Map Click on the desired times to enable features at that time period. You can hold your mouse for faster entry. https://www.peplink.com 201 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.1.5 Email Notication The email notification functionality of the Peplink Balance provides a system administrator with up-to-date information on network status. The settings for configuring email notification are found at System>Email Notification . Email Notification Settings Email Notification This setting specifies whether or not to enable email notification. If Enable is checked, the Peplink Balance will send email messages to system administrators when the WAN status changes or when new firmware is available. If Enable is not checked, email notification is disabled and the Peplink Balance will not send email messages. SMTP Server This setting specifies the SMTP server to be used for sending email. If the server requires authentication, check Require authentication . This setting specifies via a drop-down menu one of the following valid Connection Security:
Connection Security None STARTTLS SSL/TLS SMTP Port SMTP User Name /
Password This field is for specifying the SMTP port number. By default, this is set to 25 . If Connection Security is selected STARTTLS , the default port number will be set to 587 . If Connection Security is selected SSL/TLS , the default port number will be set to 465 . You may customize the port number by editing this field. This setting specifies the SMTP username and password while sending email. These options are shown only if Require authentication is checked in the SMTP Server setting. https://www.peplink.com 202 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Confirm SMTP Password Senders Email Address Recipients Email Address This field allows you to verify and confirm the new administrator password. This setting specifies the email address which the Peplink Balance will use to send its reports. This setting specifies the email address(es) to which the Peplink Balance will send email notifications. For multiple recipients, separate each email using the enter key. After you have finished setting up email notifications, you can click the Test Email Notification button to test the settings before saving. After Test Email Notification is clicked, you will see this screen to confirm the settings:
Click Send Test Notification to confirm. In a few seconds, you will see a message with detailed test results. https://www.peplink.com 203 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 204 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.1.6 Event Log Event log functionality enables event logging at a specified remote syslog server. The settings for configuring the remote system log can be found at System>Event Log . Remote Syslog Settings Remote Syslog This setting specifies whether or not to log events at the specified remote syslog server. Remote Syslog Host This setting specifies the IP address or hostname of the remote syslog server. Push Events The Peplink Balance can also send push notifications to mobile devices that have our Mobile Router Utility installed. Check the box to activate this feature. URL Logging URL Logging Host Session Logging Session Logging Host This setting is to enable event logging at the specified log server. This setting specifies the IP address or hostname of the URL log server. This setting is to enable event logging at the specified log server. This setting specifies the IP address or hostname of the Session log server. For more information on the Router Utility, go to: www.peplink.com/products/router-utility https://www.peplink.com 205 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.1.7 SNMP SNMP or simple network management protocol is an open standard that can be used to collect information about the Peplink Balance unit. SNMP configuration is located at System>SNMP . SNMP Device Name SNMP Port SNMPv1 SNMPv2 SNMPv3 SNMP Settings This field shows the router name defined at System>Admin Security . This option specifies the port which SNMP will use. The default port is 161 . This option allows you to enable SNMP version 1. This option allows you to enable SNMP version 2. This option allows you to enable SNMP version 3. SNMP Trap This option allows you to enable SNMP Trap. If enabled, the following entry fields will https://www.peplink.com 206 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink appear. This setting specifies the SNMP Trap community name. Enter the IP address of the SNMP Trap server SNMP Trap Community SNMP Trap Server SNMP Trap Port This option specifies the port which the SNMP Trap server will use. The default port is 162 . SNMP Trap Server Heartbeat This option allows you to enable and configure the heartbeat interval for the SNMP Trap server. To add a community for either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2, click the Add SNMP Community button in the Community Name table, upon which the following screen is displayed:
SNMP Community Settings This setting specifies the SNMP community name. This setting specifies a subnet from which access to the SNMP server is allowed. Enter subnet address here (e.g., 192.168.1.0 ) and select the appropriate subnet mask. Community Name Allowed Source Subnet Address To define a user name for SNMPv3, click Add SNMP User in the SNMPv3 User Name table, upon which the following screen is displayed:
https://www.peplink.com 207 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink User Name This setting specifies a user name to be used in SNMPv3. SNMPv3 User Settings This setting specifies via a drop-down menu one of the following valid authentication protocols:
Authentication Protocol NONE MD5 SHA When MD5 or SHA is selected, an entry field will appear for the password. This setting specifies via a drop-down menu one of the following valid privacy protocols:
Privacy Protocol NONE DES When DES is selected, an entry field will appear for the password. 12.1.8 SMS Control SMS Control allows the user to control the device using SMS even if the modem does not have a data connection. The settings for configuring the SMS Control can be found at System>SMS Control . Note: Supported Models Balance/MAX : *-LTE-E, *-LTEA-W, *-LTEA-P, *-LTE-MX EPX : *-LW*, *-LP*
When this box is checked, the device will be allowed to take actions according to received commands via SMS. Make sure your mobile plan supports SMS, and note that some plans may incur additional charges for this. SMS Control can reboot devices and configure cellular settings over signalling channels, even if the modem does not have an active data connection. For details of supported SMS command sets, please refer to our knowledge base . https://www.peplink.com 208 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Enable Click the checkbox to enable the SMS Control. SMS Control Settings Password This setting sets the password for authentication - maximum of 32 characters, which cannot include semicolon (;). White List Optionally, you can add phone number(s) to the whitelist. Only matching phone numbers are allowed to issue SMS commands. Phone numbers must be in the E.164 International Phone Numbers format. https://www.peplink.com 209 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.1.9 InControl InControl is a cloud-based service which allows you to manage all of your Peplink and Pepwave devices with one unified system. With it, you can generate reports, gather statistics, and configure your devices automatically. All of this is now possible with InControl. When this checkbox is checked, the device's status information will be sent to the Peplink InControl system. This device's usage data and configuration will be sent to the system if you enable the features in the system. When the box Restricted to Status Reporting Only is ticked, the router will only report its status, but cant be managed or configured by InControl. Alternatively, you can also privately host InControl. Simply check the Privately Host InControl box and enter the IP Address of your InControl Host. If you have multiple hosts, you may enter the primary and backup IP addresses for the InControl Host and tick the Fail over to InControl in the cloud box. The device will connect to either the primary InControl Host or the secondary/backup ICA/IC2. You can sign up for an InControl account at https://incontrol2.peplink.com/ . You can register your devices under the account, monitor their status, see their usage reports, and receive offline notifications. https://www.peplink.com 210 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.1.10 Conguration Backing up Peplink Balance settings immediately after successful completion of initial setup is strongly recommended. The functionality to download and upload Peplink Balance settings is found at System>Configuration . Restore Configuration to Factory Settings Download Active Configurations Upload Configurations Upload Configurations from High Availability Pair Configuration The Restore Factory Settings button is to reset the configuration to factory default settings. After clicking the button, you will need to click the Apply Changes button on the top right corner to make the settings effective. Click Download to backup the current active settings. To restore or change settings based on a configuration file, click Choose File to locate the configuration file on the local computer, and then click Upload . The new settings can then be applied by clicking the Apply Changes button on the page header, or you can cancel the procedure by pressing discard on the main page of the web admin interface. In a high availability (HA) configuration, the Balance unit can quickly load the configuration of its HA counterpart. To do so, click the Upload button. After loading the settings, configure the LAN IP address of the Peplink Balance unit so that it is different from the HA counterpart. https://www.peplink.com 211 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.1.11 Feature Add-ons Some balance models have features that can be activated upon purchase. Once the purchase is complete, you will receive an activation key. Enter the key in the Activation Key field, click Activate , and then click Apply Changes . 12.1.12 Reboot This page provides a reboot button for restarting the system. For maximum reliability, the Peplink Balance Series can be equipped with two copies of firmware, and each copy can be a different version. You can select the firmware version you would like to reboot the device with. The firmware marked with (Running) is the current system boot up firmware. Please note that a firmware upgrade will always replace the inactive firmware partition. https://www.peplink.com 212 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.2 Tools 12.2.1 Ping The ping test tool sends pings through a specific Ethernet interface or a SpeedFusion TM VPN connection. You can specify the number of pings in the field Number of times to a maximum number of 10 times. Packet Size can be set to a maximum of 1472 bytes. The ping utility is located at System>Tools>Ping , illustrated below:
A system administrator can use the ping utility to manually check the connectivity of a particular LAN/WAN connection. Tip https://www.peplink.com 213 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.2.2 Traceroute The traceroute test tool traces the routing path to the destination through a particular Ethernet interface at System>Tools>Traceroute . SpeedFusion TM connection. traceroute located utility The test or is a A system administrator can use the traceroute utility to analyze the connection path of a LAN/WAN connection. Tip 12.2.3 Wake-on-LAN Peplink routers can send special magic packets to any client specified from the Web UI. To access this feature, navigate to System > Tools > Wake-on-LAN Select a client from the drop-down list and click Send to send a magic packet https://www.peplink.com 214 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.2.4 WAN Analysis The WAN Analysis feature allows you to run a WAN to WAN speed test between 2 Peplink devices . You can set a device up as a Server or a Client . One device must be set up as a server to run the speed tests and the server must have a public IP address. The default port is 6000 and can be changed if required. The IP address of the WAN interface will be shown in the WAN Connection Status section. https://www.peplink.com 215 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The client side has a few more settings that can be changed. Make sure that the Control Port matches whats been entered on the server side. Select the WAN(s) that will be used for testing and enter the Servers WAN IP address. Once all of the options have been set, click the Start Test button. https://www.peplink.com 216 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The test output will show the Data Streams Parameters , the Throughput as a graph, and the Results . The test can be run again once its complete by clicking the Start button or you can click Close and change the parameters for the test. https://www.peplink.com 217 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.3 CLI (Command Line) Support The serial console connector on some Peplink Balance units is RJ-45. To access the serial console port, prepare a RJ-45 to DB-9 console cable. Connect the RJ-45 end to the unit's console port and the DB-9 end to a terminal's serial port. The port setting will be 115200,8N1 . The serial console connector on other Peplink Balance units is a DB-9 male connector. To access the serial console port, connect a null modem cable with a DB-9 connector on both ends to a terminal with the port setting of 115200,8N1 . https://www.peplink.com 218 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13 Status Tab 13.1 Status 13.1.1 Device System information is located at Status>Device . https://www.peplink.com 219 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Router Name This is the name specified in the Router Name field located at System>Admin Security . System Information Model Hardware Revision This shows the model name and number of this device. This shows the hardware version of this device. Serial Number This shows the serial number of this device. Firmware Uptime This shows the firmware version this device is currently running. This shows the length of time since the device has been rebooted. System Time This shows the current system time. Diagnostic Report Remote Assistance The Download link is for exporting a diagnostic report file required for system investigation. Click Turn on to enable remote assistance. The second table shows the MAC address of each LAN/WAN interface connected. Important Note If you encounter issues and would like to contact the Peplink Support Team ( http://www.peplink.com/contact/ ), please download the diagnostic report file and attach it along with a description of your issue. https://www.peplink.com 220 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13.1.2 Active Sessions Information on active sessions can be found at Status>Active Sessions>Overview . This screen displays the number of sessions initiated by each application. Click on each service listing for additional information. This screen also indicates the number of sessions initiated by each WAN port. Finally, you can see which clients are initiating the most sessions. https://www.peplink.com 221 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink In addition, you can also perform a filtered search for specific sessions. You can filter by subnet, Status>Active port, Sessions>Search . interface. protocol, navigate perform search, and To to a This Active Sessions section displays the active inbound / outbound sessions of each WAN connection on the Peplink Balance. A filter is available to help sort out the active session information. Enter a keyword in the field or check one of the WAN connection boxes for filtering. https://www.peplink.com 222 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13.1.3 Client List The client list table is located at Status>Client List . It lists DHCP and online client IP addresses, type, names (retrieved from the DHCP reservation table or defined by users), current download and upload rate, and MAC address. Clients can be imported into the DHCP reservation table by clicking the right. Further update the record after the import by going to Network>LAN . button on the If the PPTP server SpeedFusion TM , or AP controller is enabled, you may see the corresponding connection name listed in the Name field. In the client list table, there is a Ban Client feature which is used to disconnect the Wi-Fi and Remote User Access clients by clicking the button on the right. There is a blocklist on the same page after you banned the Wi-Fi or Remote User Access clients. https://www.peplink.com 223 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink You may also unblock the Wi-Fi or Remote User Access clients when the client devices need to reconnect the network by clicking the button on the right. 13.1.4 WINS Clients The WINS client list table is located at Status>WINS Client . The WINS client table lists the IP addresses and names of WINS clients. This option will only be available when you have enabled the WINS server The names of clients retrieved will be automatically matched into the Client List (see previous section). Click Flush All to flush all WINS client records. 13.1.5 OSPF & RIPv2 Information on OSPF and RIPv2 routing setup can be found at Status>OSPF & RIPv2 . https://www.peplink.com 224 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13.1.6 MediaFast To get details on storage and bandwidth usage, select Status>MediaFast . https://www.peplink.com 225 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13.1.7 PepVPN / SpeedFusion Status PepVPN/SpeedFusion Status shows the current connection status of each connection profile and is displayed at Status> PepVPN/SpeedFusion. Click on the corresponding peer name to explore the WAN connection(s) status and subnet information of each VPN peer. https://www.peplink.com 226 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click the latency, and drop-rate information for each WAN connection. button for PepVPN/SpeedFusion chart displaying real-time throughput, https://www.peplink.com 227 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink When pressing the the following menu will appear:
button for a PepVPN/SpeedFusion Tunnel Bandwidth Test Tool, The connection information shows the details of the selected PepVPN profile, consisting of the Profile name, Router ID , Router Nam e and Serial Number of the remote router Advanced features for the PepVPN profile will also be shown when the More Information checkbox is selected. The WAN statistics show information about the local and remote WAN connections (when show Remote connections ) is selected. The available details are WAN Name, IP address and port used for the Speedfusion connection. Rx and Tx rates, Loss rate and Latency . Connections can be temporarily disabled by sliding the switch button next to a WAN connection to the left. The wan-to-wan connection disabled by the switch is temporary and will be re-enabled after 15 minutes without any action. This can be used when testing the PepVPN speed between two locations to see if there is interference or network congestion between certain WAN connections. https://www.peplink.com 228 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The PepVPN/SpeedFusion test configuration allows us to configure and perform thorough tests. This is usually done after the initial installation of the routers and in case there are problems with aggregation. Press the Start button to perform throughput test according to the configured options. If TCP is selected, 4 parallel streams will be generated to get the optimal results by default. This can be customized by selecting a different value of streams. Using more streams will typically get better results if the latency of the tunnel is high. https://www.peplink.com 229 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13.1.8 Event Log Event log information is located at Status>Event Log . Device Event Log The log section displays a list of events that have taken place on the Peplink Balance unit. Check Auto Refresh to refresh log entries automatically. Click the Clear Log button to clear the log. IPsec Event Log This section displays a list of events that have taken place within an IPsec VPN connection. https://www.peplink.com 230 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Check the box next to Auto Refresh and the log will be refreshed automatically. For an AP event log, navigate to AP > Info . 13.2 WAN Quality The Status > WAN Quality allows to show detailed information about each connected WAN connection. 13.3 Usage Reports This section shows the bandwidth usage statistics, located at Status > Bandwidth . Bandwidth usage at the LAN while the device is switched off (e.g., LAN bypass) is neither recorded nor shown. 13.3.1 Real-Time The Data transferred since installation table indicates how much network traffic has been processed by the device since the first bootup. The Data transferred since last reboot table indicates how much network traffic has been processed by the device since the last bootup. https://www.peplink.com 231 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 232 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13.3.2 Hourly This page shows the hourly bandwidth usage for all WAN connections, with the option of viewing each individual connection. Select the desired connection to check from the drop-down menu. 13.3.3 Daily This page shows the daily bandwidth usage for all WAN connections, with the option of viewing each individual connection. Select the connection to check from the drop-down menu. If you have enabled the Bandwidth Monitoring feature as shown in Section 13.4, the Current Billing Cycle table for that WAN connection will be displayed. Click on a date to view the client bandwidth usage of that specific date. This feature is not available if you have selected to view the bandwidth usage of only a particular WAN connection. The scale of the graph can be set to display megabytes ( MB ) or gigabytes ( GB ). https://www.peplink.com 233 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Status https://www.peplink.com 234 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click on a specific date to receive a breakdown of all client usage for that date. https://www.peplink.com 235 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13.3.4 Monthly This page shows the monthly bandwidth usage for each WAN connection. If you have enabled Bandwidth Monitoring feature as shown in Section 13.4 , you can check the usage of each particular connection and view the information by Billing Cycle or by Calendar Month . Click the first two rows to view the client bandwidth usage in the last two months. This feature is not available if you have chosen to view the bandwidth of an individual WAN connection. The scale of the graph can be set to display megabytes ( MB ) or gigabytes ( GB ). Click on a specific month to receive a breakdown of all client usage for that month. https://www.peplink.com 236 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Appendix Appendix A. Restoration of Factory Defaults To restore the factory default settings on a Peplink Balance unit, perform the following:
For Balance models with a reset button:
1. 2. Locate the reset button on the Peplink Balance unit. With a paperclip, press and keep the reset button pressed. Hold for 5-10 seconds for admin password reset (Note: The LED status light blinks in RED 2 times and release the button, green status light starts blinking) Hold for approximately 20 seconds for factory reset (Note: The LED status light blinks in RED 3 times and release the button, all WAN/LAN port lights start blinking) After the Peplink Balance router finishes rebooting, the factory default settings will be restored. For Balance/MediaFast models with an LCD menu:
on Use front Maintenance > Factory Defaults , and then choose Yes to confirm. buttons control panel the the the to LCD menu to go to Afterwards, the factory default settings will be restored. Important Note All previous configurations and bandwidth usage data will be lost after restoring factory default settings. Regular backup of configuration settings is strongly recommended. Appendix B. Routing under DHCP, Static IP, and PPPoE The information in this appendix applies only to situations where the Peplink Balance operates a WAN connection under DHCP, Static IP, or PPPoE. B.1 Routing Via Network Address Translation (NAT) When the Peplink Balance is operating under NAT mode, the source IP addresses of outgoing IP packets are translated to the WAN IP address of the Peplink Balance. With NAT, all LAN devices share the same WAN IP address to access the Internet (i.e., the WAN IP address of the Peplink Balance). Operating the Peplink Balance in NAT mode requires only one WAN (Internet) IP address. In addition, operating in NAT mode also has security advantages because LAN devices are hidden behind the Peplink Balance. They are not directly accessible from the Internet and hence less vulnerable to attacks. https://www.peplink.com 237 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The following figure shows the packet flow in NAT mode:
B.2 Routing Via IP Forwarding When the Peplink Balance is operating under IP forwarding mode, the IP addresses of IP packets are unchanged; the Peplink Balance forwards both inbound and outbound IP packets without changing their IP addresses. The following figure shows the packet flow in IP forwarding mode:
https://www.peplink.com 238 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 239 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Appendix C. FusionSIM Manual Peplink has developed a unique technology called FusionSIM, which allows SIM cards to remotely link to a cellular router. This can be done via cloud or within the same physical network. There are a few key scenarios to fit certain applications. The purpose of this manual is to provide an introduction on where to start and how to set up for the most common scenarios and uses. Requirements 1. A Cellular router that supports FusionSIM technology 2. SIM Injector 3. SIM card Notes:
Always check for the latest Firmware version for both the cellular router and the SIM Injector. You can also check for the latest Firmware version on the devices WEB configuration page. A list of products that support FusionSIM can be found on the SIM Injector WEB page . Please check under the section Supported models . SIM Injector reset and login details How to reset a SIM Injector:
Hold the reset button for 5-10 seconds. Once the LED status light turns RED, the reset button can be released. SIM Injector will reboot and start with the factory default settings. The default WEB login settings:
User : admin Password : admin IP address: the device only has a DHCP client and no fallback IP address. Therefore, it is advised to check every time what IP address is assigned to the SIM Injector. Notes:
The SIM Injector can be monitored via InControl 2. Configuration is not supported. https://www.peplink.com 240 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Scenario 1: SIM Injector in LAN of Cellular Router Setup topology This is the most basic scenario in which the SIM Injector is connected directly to the cellular routers LAN port via an ethernet cable. This allows for the cellular router to be positioned for the best possible signal. Meanwhile, the SIM cards can be conveniently located in other locations such as the office, passenger area, or the bridge of a ship. The SIM Injector allows for easily swapping SIM cards without needing to access a cellular router. IMPORTANT: Cellular WAN will not fallback to the local SIM if it is configured to use the SIM Injector. Configuring the SIM Injector 1. Connect the SIM Injector to the LAN port of the cellular router. 2. Insert SIM cards into the SIM Injector. The SIM cards will be automatically detected. IMPORTANT: SIM cards inserted into SIM Injector must not have a PIN code. Note 1: The SIM Injector gets its IP address via DHCP and doesn't have a static IP address. To find its address, please check the DHCP lease on the cellular router. Configuring the Cellular Router https://www.peplink.com 241 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Step 1. Enable the SIM Injector communication protocol. 1a. If you are using a Balance cellular router, go to the Network tab (top navigation bar). 1b. If you are using a MAX cellular router, go to the Advanced tab (top navigation bar). 2. Under Misc. settings (left navigation bar) find Remote SIM Management . 3. In Remote SIM Management , click on the edit icon next to Remote SIM is Disabled . 4. Check the Auto LAN discovery checkbox and click Save and Apply Changes . 5. Click Save and then Apply Changes . Step 2. Enable RemoteSIM for the selected Cellular interface. 1. Go to Network (top navigation bar), then WAN (left navigation bar) and click Details for a page. selected Connection Settings cellular WAN. WAN open This the will 2. Scroll down to Cellular settings . 3. In the SIM Card section, select Use Remote SIM Only . 4. Enter configuration settings in Remote SIM Settings section. Click on Scan nearby remote SIM server to show the serial number(s) of the connected SIM Injector(s). Available configuration options for cellular interface are shown below:
https://www.peplink.com 242 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink A. Defining SIM Injector(s)
- Format: <S/N>
- Example 1: 1111-2222-3333
- Example 2: 1111-2222-3333 4444-5555-6666 B. Defining SIM Injector(s) SIM slot(s):
- Format: <S/N:slot number>
- Example 1: 1111-2222-3333:7,5 (the Cellular Interface will use SIM in slot 7, then 5)
- Example 2: 1111-2222-3333:1,2 1111-2222-3333:3,4 (the cellular Interface will use SIM in slot 1, then in 2 from the first SIM Injector, and then it will use 3 and 4 from the second SIM Injector). Note: It is recommended to use different SIM slots for each cellular interface. 5. Click Save and Apply Changes . Step 3. (Optional) Custom SIM cards settings. 1a. For a Balance router, go to the Network (Top tab). 1b. For a MAX router, go to the Advanced (Top tab). 2. Under Misc. settings (Left-side tab) find Remote SIM Management . 3. Click on the Add Remote SIM button, fill in all the required info and click Save . This section allows defining custom requirements for a SIM card located in a certain SIM slot:
Enable/Disable roaming (by default roaming is disabled). Add Custom mobile operator settings (APN, user name, password). 4. Repeat configuration for all SIM cards which need custom settings. 5. Click Apply Changes to take effect. Scenario 2: SIM Injector in WAN of main Router and multiple Cellular Routers https://www.peplink.com 243 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Setup topology In this scenario, each HD Dome creates a WAN connection to the main router. A single SIM Injector is used to provide SIM cards for each HD Dome. The HD Dome can be replaced with any Peplink cellular router supporting RemoteSIM technology. This scenario requires the completion of the configuration steps shown in Scenario 1 in addition to the configuration steps explained below. Additional configurations for Cellular Routers Step 1. Disable the DHCP server.
HD Dome 1 should act as a DHCP server. HD Dome 2 should be configured to have a static IP address with DHCP disabled. Both routers should be in the same subnet (e.g. 192.168.50.1 and 192.168.50.2). 1. Go to Network (Top tab), then Network Settings (Left-side tab), and click on Untagged LAN . This will open up the LAN settings page. 2. Change the IP address to 192.168.50.2. 3. In the DHCP Server section, uncheck the checkbox to disable DHCP Server. 4. Click Save and Apply Changes . https://www.peplink.com 244 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Step 2. Ethernet port configuration The Ethernet port must be set to ACCESS mode for each HD Dome. To do this, dummy VLANs need to be created first. 1. Go to Network (Top tab), then Network Settings (Left-side tab), and click on New LAN . This will open the settings page to create a dummy VLAN. 2. The image below shows the values that need to be changed to create a new VLAN:
Note : set different IP addresses for each HD dome (e.g. 192.168.10.1 and 192.168.10.2). 3. Click Save and Apply Changes . 4. Go to Network (Top tab), then Port Settings (Left-side tab). 5. Set the Port Type to Access and set VLAN to Untagged LAN (see picture below). 6. Click Save and Apply Changes . Configuration requirements for the main Router https://www.peplink.com 245 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Requirements for the main router are:
Configure WAN 1 as a DHCP client. WAN 1 will automatically get the Gateway IP address from HD Dome 1. Configure WAN 2 as a Static IP and set it to 192.168.50.12. Configure WAN 2 Gateway to 192.168.50.2. Same as the HD Dome 2s IP address. https://www.peplink.com 246 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Scenario 3: SIM Injector in LAN of main Router and multiple Cellular Routers Setup topology In this scenario, SIMs are provided to the HD Domes via the main router. In this example, the Remote SIM Proxy functionality needs to be enabled on the main router. Notes:
HD Dome can be replaced with any other cellular router that supports RemoteSIM. https://www.peplink.com 247 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
It is recommended to use Peplink Balance series or X series routers as the main router. This scenario requires the completion of the configuration steps for the cellular router and the SIM Injector as in Scenario 1. The configuration for the main router is explained below. Main Router configuration IMPORTANT: Main router LAN side and Cellular Routers must be configured using different subnets, e.g. 192.168. 50 .1/24 and 192.168. 100 .1/24. Note : please make sure the Peplink router is running Firmware 8.1.0 or above. 1. Open the main router WEB interface and change:
From <IP address>/cgi-bin/MANGA/ index.cgi to <IP address>/cgi-bin/MANGA/ support.cgi . This will open the support.cgi page. 2. Scroll down to find Remote SIM Proxy and click on [click to configure] that is located next to it. 3. Check the Enable checkbox. 4. Click on Save . 5. Go back to the index.cgi page and click on Apply Changes . https://www.peplink.com 248 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Scenario 4: SIM Injector in a remote location Setup topology Requirements for installing a SIM Injector in a remote location:
Cellular router communicates with the SIM Injector via UDP port 50000. Therefore this port must be reachable via public IP over the Internet. The one way latency between the cellular router and the SIM Injector should be up to 250 ms. A higher latency may lead to stability issues. The cellular router must have Internet connection to connect to the SIM Injector. It can be another Internet connection via Ethernet or Fiber if possible, or a secondary cellular interface with a local SIM (Ignite SIM). Due to its high latency, it is not recommended to use satellite WAN for connecting to a SIM Injector in remote locations. SIM Injector configuration is the same as in Scenario 1. Cellular Router configuration https://www.peplink.com 249 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Step 1. Enable the SIM Injector communication protocol. 1a. For a Balance cellular router, go to the Network (Top tab). 1b. For a MAX cellular router, go to the Advanced (Top tab). 2. Under Misc. settings (Left-side tab), find Remote SIM Management . 3. In Remote SIM Management , click on the edit icon next to Remote SIM is Disabled. 4. Enter the public IP of the SIM Injector and click Save and Apply Changes . Notes:
Do NOT check Auto LAN Discovery . Adding a SIM Injector serial number to the Remote SIM Host field is a mistake!
Step 2. RemoteSIM and custom SIM card settings configurations are the same as in Scenario 1. https://www.peplink.com 250 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink How to check if a Pepwave Cellular Router supports Remote SIM 1. Go to Network (Top tab), then WAN (Left-side tab), and click Details on any cellular WAN. This will open the WAN Connection Settings page. 2. Scroll down to Cellular settings . If you can see the Remote SIM Settings section, then the cellular router supports RemoteSIM. Monitor the status of the Remote SIM 1. Go to Network (Top tab), then WAN (Left-side tab), and click Details on the cellular WAN which was configured to use RemoteSIM. 2. Check the WAN Connection Status section. Within the cell WAN details, there is a section for Remote SIM (SIM card IMSI, SIM Injector serial number and SIM slot). https://www.peplink.com 251 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Appendix D. Case studies MPLS Alternative Our SpeedFusion enabled routers can be used to bond multiple low-cost/commodity Internet connections to replace an expensive managed business Internet connection, private leased line, MPLS, and frame relay without sacrificing reliability and availability. Below are typical deployments for using our Balance routers to replace expensive MPLS connections with commodity connections, such as ADSL, 3G, and 4G LTE links. Special features of Balance 580: have high availability capability Special features of Balance 2500: have high availability capability and capable of connecting to optical fiber based LAN through SFP+ connector Our WAN-bonding routers which comprise our Balance series and MediaFast series are capable of connecting multiple devices, and end users networks to the Internet through multiple Internet connections. Our MediaFast series routers have been helping students at many education institutions to enjoy uninterrupted learning Option 1: MPLS Supplement https://www.peplink.com 252 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Affordably increase your bandwidth by adding commodity ADSL links to your MPLS connection. SpeedFusion technology bonds all your connections together, enabling session-persistent, user-transparent hot failover. QoS support, bandwidth control, and traffic prioritization gives you total control over your network. https://www.peplink.com 253 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Option 2: MPLS Alternative Achieve faster speeds and greater reliability while paying only 20% of MPLS costs by connecting multiple ADSL, 3G, and 4G LTE links. Choose a topology that suits your requirements: a hub-and-spoke topology maximizes control over your network, while a meshed topology can reduce your bandwidth overhead by enabling your devices to form Unbreakable VPN connections directly with each other. https://www.peplink.com 254 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Here is an example of to supplement of existing Multi-Office MPLS network with DSL bonding through SpeedFusion using a Balance 580 at the headquarters and Balance 210/310 at branch offices. Environment:
This organization has one head office with two branch offices, with most of the crucial information stored in a server room at the head office. They are connecting the offices together using a managed MPLS Solution. However, the MPLS Network is operating at capacity and upgrading the links is cost prohibitive. As the organization grows, it needs a cost-efficient way to add more bandwidth to its wide area network. Internet access at the remote sites is sent via a web proxy at head office for corporate web filtering compliance. Requirement:
User sessions need to remain uninterrupted More bandwidth is required at the head office location for direct internet access. Recommended Solution:
Form a SpeedFusion tunnel between the branch offices and head office to bond the MPLS and additional DSL lines. SpeedFusion allows for hot failover, maintaining a persistent session while switching connections. The DSLs at head office can be used for direct internet access providing lots of cheap internet bandwidth. Head office can use outbound policies to send internet traffic out over the DSLs and only use the MPLS connection for speedfusion, freeing up bandwidth.
https://www.peplink.com 255 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Devices Deployed : Balance 210, Balance 310, Balance 580 Harrington Industrial Plastics Overview Harrington Plastics, the USs largest industrial plastics distributor, was looking to upgrade its network equipment. Harringtons team came across Peplink and started thinking about MPLS alternatives. By choosing Peplink, they saved a fortune on upgrades and ended up with yearly savings of up to $100,000. Requirements
Zero network outages Flexible resilience options Cost-effective solution Solution
Peplink Balance 1350 Peplink Balance 380 Unbreakable VPN Benets
Extreme savings of $100,000 per year https://www.peplink.com 256 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
4x the bandwidth Seamless hardware failover Highly available network due to WAN diversity Highly cost-effective compared to competing solutions Easy resilience achieved by adding 4G USB modems Time For An Upgrade Harrington Industrial Plastics decided it was time to upgrade its network equipment. Its existing solution used redundant MPLS for site-to-site traffic and broadband connections for Internet access. Harrington is the USs largest distributor of industrial plastics piping, serving all industries with corrosive and high-purity applications. It requires peak performance at all times in order to serve its large customer base and 43 busy branches. Quick Deployment and Unbreakable Connectivity In evaluating an upgrade to its network infrastructure, it was only natural that Harrington settled on the best in the industry Peplink. Peplink partner Frontier Computer Corporation was chosen to help design and deploy the solution. Since Peplink gear is so easy to configure and install, Harrington was able to design, prototype and roll out the entire solution to the corporate headquarters and all 43 branches within just one year. https://www.peplink.com 257 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The corporate office houses a pair of redundant Balance 1350s for hardware resilience. Served by 4 separate links from multiple service providers, the networks chance of an outage is practically zero. All 43 branches are now equipped with a fleet of Balance 380s, bonding a combination of DSL, cable and fiber-optic links together with an additional 4G USB modem for added resilience. These work together to create an Unbreakable VPN connection to the Balance 1350s at the corporate office, connecting the final dot. Dependable, Resilient Networking thats also Very Budget-friendly https://www.peplink.com 258 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Harrington Industrial Plastics couldnt be happier. They now benefit from an extremely reliable and cost-effective network. Supplying additional resilience is as easy as plugging in a 4G USB modem. Where the MPLS 768kb deployed previously had cost them $192000 a year for all 40 sites, their new solution is now only costing them $92000. Their total bandwidth has been bumped from 36 Mbps to 138 Mbps. PLUSS Peplink + Citrix + VoIP Adds Up to Fast, Cost-Effective WAN for Pluss A Peplink customer since 2006, Pluss is a social enterprise that each year makes gainful employment a reality for more than 5000 disabled and disadvantaged UK citizens. With 37 locations and 300+ active users, Pluss makes heavy use of its WAN infrastructure, which until recently was built on managed MPLS lines. Hoping to cut expenses and, if possible, boost performance at the same time, Steve Taylor, IT Manager at Pluss, set out to find a solution that would allow Pluss to replace costly MPLS service with a commodity alternative, such as DSL or EFM. Steve found the solution Pluss needed in Peplink products, especially the Balance series of https://www.peplink.com 259 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink high-performance enterprise routers and SpeedFusion bonding technology. Pluss now powers its entire WAN infrastructure with simple-to-install, highly reliable, and cost-effective Peplink gear, which allows it to aggregate DSL and other commodity connections and replace expensive leased lines. Colgio Next - Enabling eLearning Colgio Next, a recognized Apple Distinguished School - deploys over 500 iPads to its 600 students as a teaching and learning tool. Despite being equipped with iPads, teachers and students alike were not making use of them. The reason for this was because of the slow network access speeds. Apps would not download https://www.peplink.com 260 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink and course contents were inaccessible. Often, having more than a couple students connected to the same Wi-Fi access point was enough to bring it to its knees. Colgio Next needed a unique solution, so they contacted Peplink. Requirements
Solve network congestion problem caused by 600 students over rural Internet connections
Wi-Fi that can handle 50+ users per classroom An affordable network infrastructure that can provide simultaneous access to media-rich educational content Solution
Peplink MediaFast Multi-WAN Content-caching router, tailor-made for Education networking. AP One 300M Enterprise grade AP, 5GHz Wi-Fi, up to 60 concurrent users. Benets
Instant, simultaneous access to media-rich educational content for 500+ iPads
Wi-Fi connection stability for 50+ users per classroom, not achievable by other tested equipment Teachers, students and guests can be assigned access priority to available bandwidth, further preventing congestion iOS updates (often 2GB size) no longer congest the network as they are downloaded only once, cached on the MediaFast and then distributed to all iOS devices AP Controller makes MAC Address Filtering easy. Students are assigned to designated APs by their devices' MAC Address in order to prevent saturating any single AP. Flawless iPad AirPlay mirroring at all times iPads are used all day, reaching their full potential with a fast and stable network all the time Students are far more engaged and teachers rely on their iPads all day https://www.peplink.com 261 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 262 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Performance Optimization Scenario In this scenario, email and web browsing are the two main Internet services used by LAN users. The mail server is external to the network. The connections are ADSL (WAN1, with slow uplink and fast downlink) and Metro Ethernet (WAN2, symmetric). Solution For optimal performance with this configuration, individually set the WAN load balance according to the characteristics of each service. Web browsing mainly downloads data; sending emails mainly consumes upload bandwidth. Both connections offer good download speeds; WAN2 offers good upload speeds. Define WAN1 and WAN2's inbound and outbound bandwidths to be 30M/2M and 50M/50M, respectively. This will ensure that outbound traffic is more likely to be routed through WAN2. For HTTP, set the weight to 3:4. For SMTP, set the weight to 1:8, such that users will have a greater chance to be routed via WAN2 when sending email. Maintaining the Same IP Address Throughout a Session Scenario Some IP address-sensitive websites (for example, Internet banking) use both client IP address and cookie matching for session identification. Since load balancing uses different IP addresses, the session is dropped when a mismatched IP is detected, resulting in frequent interruptions while visiting such sites. Solution Make use of the persistence functionality of the Peplink Balance. With persistence configured and the By Destination option selected, the Peplink Balance will use a consistent WAN connection for source-destination pairs of IP addresses, preventing sessions from being dropped. With persistence configured and the option By Source is selected, the Peplink Balance uses a consistent WAN connection for same-source IP addresses. This option offers higher application compatibility but may inhibit the load balancing function unless there are many clients using the Internet. Settings Set persistence in at Advanced>Outbound Policy . https://www.peplink.com 263 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click Add Rule , select HTTP (TCP port 80) for web service, and select Persistence . Click Save and then Apply Changes , located at the top right corner, to complete the process. A network administrator can use the traceroute utility to manually analyze the connection path of a particular WAN connection. Tip Bypassing the Firewall to Access Hosts on LAN Scenario There are times when remote access to computers on the LAN is desirable; for example, when hosting web sites, online businesses, FTP download and upload areas, etc. In such cases, it may be appropriate to create an inbound NAT mapping for the network to allow some hosts on the LAN to be accessible from outside of the firewall. Solution The web admin interface can be used to add an inbound NAT mapping to a host and to bind the host to the WAN connection(s) of your choice. To begin, navigate to Network>NAT Mappings . In this example, the host with an IP address of 192.168.1.102 is bound to 10.90.0.75 of WAN1:
https://www.peplink.com 264 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click Save and then Apply Changes , located at the top right corner, to complete the process. Inbound Access Restriction Scenario A firewall is required in order to protect the network from potential hacker attacks and other Internet security threats. Solution Firewall functionality is built into the Peplink Balance. By default, inbound access is unrestricted. Enabling a basic level of protection involves setting up firewall rules. For example, in order to protect your private network from external access, you can set up a firewall rule between the Internet and your private network. To do so, navigate to Network>Firewall>Access Rules . Then click the Add Rule button in the Inbound Firewall Rules table and change the settings according to the following screenshot:
https://www.peplink.com 265 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink After the fields have been entered as in the screenshot, click Save to add the rule. Afterwards, change the default inbound rule to Deny by clicking the default rule in the Inbound Firewall Rules table. Click Apply Changes on the top right corner to complete the process. Outbound Access Restriction Scenario For security reasons, it may be appropriate to restrict outbound access. For example, you may want to prevent LAN users from using ftp to transfer files to and from the Internet. This can easily be achieved by setting up an outbound firewall rule with the Peplink Balance. Solution To setup a firewall between the Internet and private network for outbound access, navigate to Network>Firewall>Access Rules . Click the Add Rule button in the Outbound Firewall Rules table, and then adjust settings according the screenshot:
https://www.peplink.com 266 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink After the fields have been entered as in the screenshot, click Save to add the rule. Click Apply Changes on the top right corner to complete the process. https://www.peplink.com 267 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Appendix E. Overview of ports used by Peplink SD-WAN routers and other Peplink services Default Number Port Usage UDP 5246 Data flow TCP 443 HTTPS service Service Inbound/Outbound InControl InControl Outbound Outbound Default Status Enabled Enabled TCP 5246 Optional, TCP 443 responding used when not is InControl Outbound Enabled TCP 5246 Remote Web Admin InControl Appliance Virtual Outbound TCP 4500 VPN Data (TCP Mode) PepVPN SpeedFusion TCP 32015 VPN handshake UDP 4500 VPN Data UDP 32015 VPN Data (alternative) PepVPN SpeedFusion PepVPN SpeedFusion PepVPN SpeedFusion TCP/UDP 4500+N-1^
UDP 32015+N-1^
VPN Data Sub-Tunnels PepVPN SpeedFusion VPN Data (alternative) Sub-Tunnels PepVPN SpeedFusion UDP 4500 VPN Data IPsec UDP 500 VPN initiation IPsec
Inbound Outbound*
Inbound Outbound*
Inbound
Outbound*
Inbound Outbound*
Inbound Outbound*
Inbound
Outbound*
Inbound Outbound*
Inbound Outbound*
L2TP L2TP L2TP Remote User Access Inbound Remote User Access Inbound Remote User Access Inbound OpenVPN Remote User Access Inbound PPTP (GRE) Remote User Access Inbound UDP 500 UDP 1701 UDP 4500 UDP 1194 IP 47 TCP 2222 Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Remote Direct connection Assistance Peplink Troubleshooting Assistance Outbound Enabled TCP 80 HTTP traffic Web Admin Interface Inbound Enabled https://www.peplink.com 268 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink TCP 443 HTTPS traffic TCP 8822 SSH UDP 161 UDP 162 SNMP Get SNMP Trap access Web Admin Interface access (secure) Inbound SSH Inbound SNMP monitoring Inbound SNMP monitoring Outbound TCP, UDP 1812 Radius Authentication Radius TCP, UDP 1813 Radius Accounting Radius UDP 123 Network Time Protocol NTP TCP 60660 Real-time location data in NMEA format GPS Disclaimer:
Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Outbound Outbound Inbound Outbound Outbound Disabled By default, only TCP 32015 and UDP 4500 are needed for PepVPN / SpeedFusion. Inbound / Outbound* - Inbound = For Server mode; Outbound = For Client mode UDP 32015 - If IPsec VPN or L2TP/IPsec RUA is enabled, the UDP 4500 is occupied, so PepVPN / SpeedFusion will automatically switch to UPD 32015 as VPN data port . UDP 32015+N-1^ / TCP/UDP 4500+N-1^ - When using Sub-Tunnels, multiple ports are in use (1 for each Sub-Tunnel profile). The default UDP data ports used when using (N number of Sub-Tunnel profiles) are:
45004500+N-1, or (when port 4500 is in use by IPsec or L2TP/IPsec) 32015 32015+N-1". https://www.peplink.com 269 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Appendix F. Troubleshooting Problem 1 Outbound load is only distributed over one WAN connection. Solution Outbound load balancing can only be distribute traffic evenly between available WAN connections if many outbound connections are made. If there is only one user on the LAN and only one download session is made from his/her browser, the WAN connections cannot be fully utilized. For a single user, download management applications are recommended. The applications can split a file into pieces and download the pieces simultaneously. Examples include: DownThemAll
(Firefox Extension), iGetter (Mac), etc. If the outbound traffic is going across the SpeedFusion TM tunnel, (i.e., transferring a file to a VPN peer) the bandwidth of all WAN connections will be bonded. In this case, all bandwidth will be utilized and a file will be transferred across all available WAN connections. For additional details, please refer to this FAQ:
https://forum.peplink.com/t/speed-test-tool-for-combined-download-speed-in-multi-wan-environ ment/8457 Problem 2 I am using a download manager program (e.g., Download Accelerator Plus, DownThemAll, etc.). Why is the download speed still only that of a single link?
Solution First, check whether all WAN connections are up. Second, ensure your download manager application has split the file into 3 parts or more. It is also possible that all of 2 or even 3 download sessions were being distributed to the same link by chance. Problem 3 I am using some websites to look up my public IP address, e.g., www.whatismyip.com . When I press the browser's Refresh button, the server almost always returns the same address. Isnt the IP address supposed to be changing for every refresh?
Solution The web server has enabled the Keep Alive function, which ensures that you use the same TCP session to query the server. Try to test with a website that does not enable Keep Alive . Problem 4 What can I do if I suspect a problem on my LAN connection?
Solution You can test the LAN connection using ping. For example, if you are using DOS/Windows, at https://www.peplink.com 270 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink the command prompt, type ping 192.168.1.1. This pings the Peplink Balance device (provided that Peplink Balances IP is 192.168.1.1) to test whether the connection to the Peplink Balance is OK. Problem 5 What can I do if I suspect a problem on my Internet/WAN connection?
Solution You can test the WAN connection using ping, as in the solution to Problem 4. As we want to isolate the problems from the LAN, ping will be performed from the Peplink Balance. By using Ping / Traceroute under the Status tab of the Peplink Balance, you may able to find the source of problem. Problem 6 When I upload files to a server via FTP, the transfer stalls after a few kilobytes of data are sent. What should I do?
Solution The maximum transmission unit (MTU) or MSS setting may need to be adjusted. By default, the MTU is set at 1440. Choose Auto for all of your WAN connections. If that does not solve the problem, you can try the MTU 1492 if a connection is DSL. If problem still persists, change the size to progressive smaller values until your problem is resolved (e.g., 1462, 1440, 1420, 1400, etc). Additional troubleshooting resources:
Peplink Community Forums: https://forum.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 271 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Appendix G. FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For Balance 30 Pro Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. FCC Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Radiation Exposure Statement :
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 49 cm between the radiator and your body. Note The country code selection is for non-US models only and is not available to all US models. Per FCC regulation, all WiFi products marketed in US must fixed to US operation channels only. Battery Caution Statement Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. https://www.peplink.com 272 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance 30 Pro ) https://www.peplink.com 273 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 274 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 19.93 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.88 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. Contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
https://www.peplink.com 275 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink For Balance one Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (Balance one) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio ex- empts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le https://www.peplink.com 276 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink brouillage est susceptible den
(i) The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potent for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems
(ii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band 5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(i) Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est reserve uniquement pour utilisation a l'interieur afin de reduire les risques de brouillage prejudiciable aux systemes de satellites mobiles utilisant les memes canaux
(ii) Le gain maximal d'antenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisan bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer a la limitation P.I.R.E specifiee pour l'exploitation point a point et non point a point, selon le cas. En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi etre avises que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont designes utilisateurs principaux (c.-a-d., qu'ils ont la priorite) pour les bande 5725-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Cet equipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED definies pour un environnement non controle. Cet equipement doit etre installe et utilise a une distance minimum de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. https://www.peplink.com 277 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance One ) https://www.peplink.com 278 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 16.59 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 21.38 dBm https://www.peplink.com 279 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 5GHz ( 5725 - 5850 MHz ) : 13.25 dBm This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. Contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 280 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink For Balance one core, Balance 20, Balance 30 LTE, Balance 210, Balance 310X, Balance 310X 5G, Balance 310 5G, Balance 310 Fiber 5G, Balance 305, Balance 380, Balance 580, Balance 710, Balance 1350, Balance 2500, EPX, Balance SDX, MediaFast 500, MediaFast 750 Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Radiation Exposure Statement (Balance 30 LTE, Balance 310X, Balance 310X 5G, Balance 310 5G, Balance 310 Fiber 5G) This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (Balance one core, Balance 20, Balance 30 LTE, Balance 310X, Balance 310X 5G, Balance 310 5G, Balance 310 Fiber 5G, Balance 305, Balance 380, Balance 580, Balance 710, Balance 1350, Balance 2500, EPX, Balance SDX, MediaFast 500, MediaFast 750) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le present produit est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Developpement economique Canada. For Balance 30 LTE, Balance 310X, Balance 310X 5G, Balance 310 5G, Balance 310 Fiber 5G This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
https://www.peplink.com 281 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den Radiation Exposure Statement (Balance 30 LTE, Balance 310X, Balance 310X 5G, Balance 310 5G, Balance 310 Fiber 5G) This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Cet quipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED dfinies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis une distance minimum de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. Battery Caution Statement (Balance 30 LTE, Balance 210, Balance 310 5G, Balance 310X, Balance 310X 5G, Balance 310 Fiber 5G, Balance SDX) Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Safety Statement (Balance SDX) Class I Equipment. This equipment must be earthed. The power plug must be connected to a properly wired earth ground socket outlet. An improperly wired socket outlet could place hazardous voltages on accessible metal parts. All Ethernet cables are designed for intra-building connection to other equipment. Do not connect these ports directly to communication wiring or other wiring that exits the building where the appliance is located. https://www.peplink.com 282 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For Balance Two Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Battery Caution Statement Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. https://www.peplink.com 283 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For Balance 20X Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the l imits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These l imits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful i nterference when the equipment i s operated i n a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and i f i t i s not i nstalled and used i n accordance with the i nstruction manual, i t may cause harmful i nterference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment i n a residential area i s l ikely to cause harmful i nterference, i n which case the user will be required to correct the i nterference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure l imits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be i nstalled and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (Balance 20X) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. This device contains l icence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas l icence-exempt RSS(s). Operation i s subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio ex- empts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
https://www.peplink.com 284 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den
(i) The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potent for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems
(ii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band 5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(i) Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est reserve uniquement pour utilisation a l'interieur afin de reduire les risques de brouillage prejudiciable aux systemes de satellites mobiles utilisant les memes canaux
(ii) Le gain maximal d'antenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisan bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer a la limitation P.I.R.E specifiee pour l'exploitation point a point et non point a point, selon le cas. En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi etre avises que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont designes utilisateurs principaux (c.-a-d., qu'ils ont la priorite) pour les bande 5725-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Cet equipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED definies pour un environnement non controle. Cet equipement doit etre installe et utilise a une distance minimum de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. Battery Caution Statement Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. https://www.peplink.com 285 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance One Core ) https://www.peplink.com 286 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 287 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance Two ) https://www.peplink.com 288 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 289 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance 20X Pro ) https://www.peplink.com 290 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 291 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 19.84 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.89 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 292 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance 30 LTE ) https://www.peplink.com 293 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) https://www.peplink.com 294 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 295 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance 210 ) https://www.peplink.com 296 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 297 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance 310 5G ) https://www.peplink.com 298 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) EM7565 module:
https://www.peplink.com 299 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink EM9191 module:
MV31-W module:
https://www.peplink.com 300 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 21cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 301 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers (Balance 310X 5G) https://www.peplink.com 302 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 303 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers (Balance 310 Fiber 5G) https://www.peplink.com 304 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 305 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 2472 MHz ) : 19.94 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.76 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 306 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance SDX ) https://www.peplink.com 307 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 308 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For Balance SDX Pro Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Industry Canada Statement (Balance SDX Pro) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical Specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. Battery Caution Statement (Balance SDX Pro) Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. https://www.peplink.com 309 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance SDX Pro ) https://www.peplink.com 310 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 311 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink contact as: https:// www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 312 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For Balance 380X, Balance 580X Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Industry Canada Statement (Balance 380X, Balance 580X) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Ce produit rpond aux spcifications techniques applicables l'innovation, Science et Dveloppement conomique Canada. https://www.peplink.com 313 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance 380X / Balance 580X ) https://www.peplink.com 314 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 315 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink contact as: https:// www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 316 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For Balance 20X Pro Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (Balance 20X Pro) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio ex-empts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den
(i) The device for operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potent for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits as appropriate; (detachable antenna only) ; and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band 5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(iii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate.
(i) Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est rserv uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;
(ii) Le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas. En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5725-5850 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL.
(iii) Le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with ISED RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Cet appareil doit tre install et utilis avec une distance minimale de 20cm entre lmetteuret votre corps. Cet appareil et sa ou ses antennes ne doivent pas tre co-localiss ou fonctionner en conjonction avec tout autre antenne ou transmetteur. This radio transmitter IC: 20682-P1AX19 has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below, with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed are strictly prohibited for use with this device. WIFI Antenna type: Omni-directional WIFI Antenna gain: 2.4GHz / 2.44 dBi 5150 ~ 5250 MHz / 4.10 dBi 5725 ~ 5850 MHz / 4.73 dBi Cet metteur radio IC : 20682-P1AX11 a t approuv par Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antennes rpertoris ci-dessous, avec le gain maximal autoris indiqu. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste qui ont un gain suprieur au gain maximum indiqu pour tout type rpertori sont strictement interdits pour une utilisation avec cet appareil. Type d'antenne WIFI : omnidirectionnelle Gain de l'antenne Wi-Fi : 2.4 GHz / 2.44 dBi 5150 ~ 5250 MHz / 4.10 dBi 5725 ~ 5850 MHz / 4.73 dBi Battery Caution Statement Risk of explosion if the battery replaced by an incorrect type, place the battery into fire, a hot oven, extremely high temperature or low air pressure surrounding environment, the leakage of flammable liquid or gas, and mechanically crushing or cutting of the battery. USB WAN Modem Port Specification Balance Series 20X Pro 30 LTE 30 Pro ONE TWO 210 Output Rating 5V DC, 2A 5V DC, 2A 5V DC, 2A 5V DC, 2A 5V DC, 1.5A 5V DC, 1A 310X 380 380X 580 580X 710 1350 2500 Output Rating 5V DC, 0.5A 5V DC, 0.5A 5V DC, 1A 5V DC, 0.5A 5V DC, 1A 5V DC, 2.5A 5V DC, 2.5A 5V DC, 2.5A https://www.peplink.com 317 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
1 2 3 | User Manual-3 | Users Manual | 5.33 MiB | October 27 2022 / April 27 2023 | delayed release |
10.14.7 Remote SIM Management Remote SIM management is accessible via Network > Misc Settings > Remote SIM Management . By default, this feature is disabled. Please note that a limited number of Pepwave routers support the SIM Injector, may refer to the link:
more details on FusionSIM Manual. https://www.peplink.com/products/sim-injector/
Appendix for or C Remote SIM Host Settings Remote SIM Host Settings Active LAN Discovery Check this box to enable Auto LAN discovery of the remote SIM server. https://www.peplink.com 170 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Remote SIM Host Enter the public IP address of the SIM Injector. If you enter IP addresses here, it is not necessary to tick the Auto LAN Discovery box above. You may define the Remote SIM information by clicking the Add Remote SIM . Here, you can enable Data Roaming and custom APN for your SIM cards. Add Remote SIM Settings SIM Server Add a new SIM Server SIM Server - Serial Number Enter the serial number of SIM Server SIM Server - Name This optional field allows you define a name for the SIM Server SIM Slot Click the drop-down menu and choose which SIM slot you want to connect. SIM Slot - Name This optional field allows you define a name for the SIM slot. https://www.peplink.com 171 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Data Roaming Enables data roaming on this particular SIM card. Operator Settings (for LTE//HSPA/EDGE/GPR S Only) This setting allows you to configure the APN settings of your connection. If Auto is selected, the mobile operator should be detected automatically. The connected device will be configured and connection will be made automatically. If there is any difficulty in making a connection, you may select Custom to enter your carriers APN, Username and Password settings manually. The correct values can be obtained from your carrier. The default and recommended setting is Auto. https://www.peplink.com 172 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.14.8 SIM Toolkit The SIM Toolkit can be found via Networks > Misc Settings > SIM Toolkit .This supports two functionalities, USSD and SMS. USSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD) is a protocol used by mobile phones to communicate with their service providers computers. One of the most common uses is to query the available balance. Enter your USSD code under the USSD Code text field and click Submit . You will receive a confirmation. To check the SMS response, click Get . After a few minutes you will receive a response to your USSD code https://www.peplink.com 173 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SMS The SMS option allows you to read SMS (text) messages that have been sent to the SIM in your Peplink router. https://www.peplink.com 174 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 11 AP Tab 11.1 AP 11.1.1 AP Controller Clicking on the AP tab will default to this menu, where you can view basic AP management options:
AP Management Support Remote AP AP Controller The AP controller for managing Pepwave APs can be enabled by checking this box. When this option is enabled, the AP controller will wait for management connections originating from APs over the LAN on TCP and UDP port 11753. It will also wait for captive portal connections on TCP port 443. An extended DHCP option, CAPWAP Access Controller addresses (field 138), will be added to the DHCP server. A local DNS record, AP Controller , will be added to the local DNS proxy. The AP controller supports remote management of Pepwave APs. When this option is enabled, the AP controller will wait for management connections originating from remote APs over the WAN on TCP and UDP port 11753. It will also wait for captive portal connections on TCP port 443. The DHCP server and/or local DNS server of the remote APs network should be configured in the DNS Proxy Settings menu under Network>LAN . The procedure is as follows:
1. Define an extended DHCP option, CAPWAP Access Controller addresses (field 138), in the DHCP server, where the values are the AP controller's public IP addresses; and/or 2. Create a local DNS record for the AP controller with a value corresponding to the AP controller's public IP address. https://www.peplink.com 175 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Sync. Method Select the required option to synchronize the managed APs. Options are:
As soon as possible (default) Progressively (synchronize APs in groups) One at a time (synchronize one AP at a time) Permitted AP Access points to manage can be specified here. If Any is selected, the AP controller will manage any AP that reports to it. If Approved List is selected, only APs with serial numbers listed in the provided text box will be managed. 11.1.2 Wireless SSID Current SSID information appears in the SSID section. To edit an existing SSID, click its name in the list. To add a new SSID, click Add . Note that the following settings vary by model. The below settings show a available by selecting the question mark in the top right corner). new SSID window with Advanced Settings enabled (these are https://www.peplink.com 176 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SSID Settings SSID Enable VLAN This setting specifies the SSID of the virtual AP to be scanned by Wi-Fi clients. Click the drop-down menu to apply a time schedule to this interface This setting specifies the VLAN ID to be tagged on all outgoing packets generated from this wireless network (i.e., packets that travel from the Wi-Fi segment through the Pepwave AP One unit to the Ethernet segment via the LAN port). The default value of this setting is 0 , which means VLAN tagging is disabled (instead of tagged with zero). Use of a VLAN pool is enabled by selecting the checkbox. Broadcast SSID This setting specifies whether or not Wi-Fi clients can scan the SSID of this wireless network. Broadcast SSID is enabled by default. Data Rate A Select Auto to allow the Pepwave router to set the data rate automatically, or select Fixed and choose a rate from the displayed drop-down menu. Multicast Filter A This setting enables the filtering of multicast network traffic to the wireless SSID. Multicast Rate A This setting specifies the transmit rate to be used for sending multicast network traffic. The selected Protocol and Channel Bonding settings will affect the rate options and values available here. IGMP Snooping A To allow the Pepwave router to listen to internet group management protocol (IGMP) network traffic, select this option. https://www.peplink.com 177 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink DHCP Relay Put the address of the DHCP server in this field.. DHCP requests will be relayed to this DHCP server DHCP Option 82 A If you use a distributed DHCP server/relay environment, you can enable this option to provide additional information on the manner in which clients are physically connected to the network. Layer 2 Isolation A Layer 2 refers to the second layer in the ISO Open System Interconnect model. When this option is enabled, clients on the same VLAN, SSID, or subnet are isolated to that VLAN, SSID, or subnet, which can enhance security. Traffic is passed to upper communication layer(s). By default, the setting is disabled. Maximum Number of Clients Indicate the maximum number of clients that should be able to connect to each frequency. Band Steering To reduce 2.4 GHz band overcrowding, AP with band steering steers clients capable of 5 GHz operation to 5 GHz frequency. Choose between:
Force - Clients capable of 5 GHz operation are only offered with 5 GHz frequency. Prefer - Clients capable of 5 GHz operation are encouraged to associate with 5 GHz frequency. If the clients insist to attempt on 2.4 GHz frequency, 2.4 GHz frequency will be offered. Disable - Default A - Advanced feature. Click the button on the top right-hand corner to activate. Security Settings This setting configures the wireless authentication and encryption methods. Available options:
Open ( No Encryption) Enhanced Open (OWE) WPA3 -Personal (AES:CCMP) WPA2/WPA3 -Personal (AES:CCMP) WPA2 -Personal (AES:CCMP) WPA2 Enterprise WPA/WPA2 - Personal (TKIP/AES: CCMP) WPA/WPA2 Enterprise Security Policy When WPA/WPA2 - Enterprise is configured, RADIUS-based 802.1 x authentication is enabled. Under this configuration, the Shared Key option should be disabled. When using this method, select the appropriate version using the V1 / V2 controls. The security level of this method is known to be very high. When WPA/WPA2- Personal is configured, a shared key is used for data encryption and https://www.peplink.com 178 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink authentication. When using this configuration, the Shared Key option should be enabled. Key length must be between eight and 63 characters (inclusive). The security level of this method is known to be high. NOTE:
When WPA2/WPA3- Personal is configured, if a managed AP which is NOT WPA3 PSK capable, the AP Controller will not push those WPA3 and WPA2/WPA3 SSID to that AP. Access Control Settings Restricted Mode The settings allow the administrator to control access using MAC address filtering. Available options are None , Deny all except listed , Accept all except listed and Radius MAC Authentication. MAC Address List Connections coming from the MAC addresses in this list will be either denied or accepted based on the option selected in the previous field. If more than one MAC address needs to be entered, you can use a carriage return to separate them. RADIUS Server Settings Host Enter the IP address of the primary RADIUS server and, if applicable, the secondary RADIUS server. Secret Enter the RADIUS shared secret for the primary server and, if applicable, the secondary RADIUS server. Authentication Port In the field, enter the UDP authentication port(s) used by your RADIUS server(s) or click the Default button to enter 1812 . Accounting In the field, enter the UDP accounting port(s) used by your RADIUS server(s) or click the https://www.peplink.com 179 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Port Default button to enter 1813 . NAS-Identifier Choose between Device Name , LAN MAC address , Device Serial Number and Custom Value Guest Protect Check this box to deny all connection attempts by private IP addresses. To create a custom subnet for guest access, enter the IP address and choose a subnet mask from the drop-down menu. To block access from a particular subnet, enter the IP address and choose a subnet mask from the drop-down menu. Block All Private IP Custom Subnet Block Exception Firewall Settings Firewall Mode The settings allow administrators to control access to the SSID based on Firewall Rules. Available options are Disable,Lockdown - Block all except... and Flexible -Allow all except... Firewall Exceptions Create Firewall Rules based on Port, IP Network, MAC address or Domain Name https://www.peplink.com 180 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 11.1.3 Wireless Mesh Wireless Mesh Support is available on devices running 802.11ac (Wi-Fi 5) and above. Along with the AP Controller, mesh network extensions can be established, which can expand network coverage. Note that the Wireless Mesh settings need to match the Mesh ID and Shared Key of the other devices on the same selected frequency band. To create a new Wireless Mesh profile, go to AP > Wireless Mesh , and click Add . Mesh ID Frequency Shared Key Wireless Mesh Settings Enter a name to represent the Mesh profile. Select the 2.4GHz or 5GHz frequency to be used. Enter the shared key in the text field. Please note that it needs to match the shared keys of the other APs in the Wireless Mesh settings. Click Hide / Show Characters to toggle visibility. 11.1.4 AP > Proles AP Profile Name Ap Profile name AP Settings https://www.peplink.com 181 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SSID You can select the wireless networks for 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz separately for each SSID. This drop-down menu specifies the national/regional regulations which the Wi-Fi radio should follow. If a North American region is selected, RF channels 1 to 11 will be available and the maximum transmission power will be 26 dBm (400 mW). If European region is selected, RF channels 1 to 13 will be available. The maximum transmission power will be 20 dBm (100 mW). NOTE: Users are required to choose an option suitable to local laws and regulations. Indicate the preferred frequency to use for clients to connect. Operating Country Preferred Frequency Important Note Per FCC regulation, the country selection is not available on all models marketed in the US. All US models are fixed to US channels only. AP Settings (part 2) Protocol This option allows you to specify whether 802.11b and/or 802.11g client association requests will be accepted. Available options are 802.11ng and 802.11na . By default, 802.11ng is selected. Channel Width Available options are 20 MHz , 40 MHz , and Auto (20/40 MHz) . Default is Auto (20/40 MHz), which allows both widths to be used simultaneously. Channel This option allows you to select which 802.11 RF channel will be utilized. Channel 1
(2.412 GHz) is selected by default. Auto Channel Update Output Power Client Signal Strength Threshold Indicate the time of day at which update automatic channel selection. This option is for specifying the transmission output power for the Wi-Fi AP. There are 4 relative power levels available Max , High , Mid , and Low . The actual output power will be bound by the regulatory limits of the selected country. Clients with signal strength lower than this value will not be allowed to connect. https://www.peplink.com 182 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Maximum number of clients This setting determines the maximum number of clients that can connect to this Wi-Fi frequency. Advanced Wi-Fi AP settings can be displayed by clicking the on the top right-hand corner of the Wi-Fi AP Settings section, which can be found at AP>Settings . Other models will display a separate section called Wi-Fi AP Advanced Settings , which can be found at Advanced>Wi-Fi Settings . Advanced AP Settings Management VLAN ID Operating Schedule This field specifies the VLAN ID to tag to management traffic, such as communication traffic between the AP and the AP Controller. The value is zero by default, which means that no VLAN tagging will be applied. NOTE: Change this value with caution as alterations may result in loss of connection to the AP Controller. Choose from the schedules that you have defined in System>Schedule. Select the schedule for the integrated AP to follow from the drop-down menu. Beacon Rate A This option is for setting the transmit bit rate for sending a beacon. By default, 1Mbps is selected. Beacon Interval A This option is for setting the time interval between each beacon. By default, 100ms is selected. DTIM A This field allows you to set the frequency for the beacon to include delivery traffic indication messages. The interval is measured in milliseconds. The default value is set to 1 ms . RTS Threshold A The RTS (Request to Clear) threshold determines the level of connection required before the AP starts sending data. The recommended standard of the RTS threshold is around 500. https://www.peplink.com 183 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Fragmentation Threshold A Distance / Time Convertor This setting determines the maximum size of a packet before it gets fragmented into multiple pieces. Select the range you wish to cover with your Wi-Fi, and the router will make recommendations for the Slot Time and ACK Timeout. Slot Time A This field is for specifying the unit wait time before transmitting a packet. By default, this field is set to 9 s . ACK Timeout A This field is for setting the wait time to receive an acknowledgement packet before performing a retransmission. By default, this field is set to 48 s . Frame Aggregation A This option allows you to enable frame aggregation to increase transmission throughput. A - Advanced feature, please click the button on the top right-hand corner to activate. Enable Web Access Protocol Management Port HTTP to HTTPS redirection Admin Username Admin Password Web Administration Settings Ticking this box enables web admin access for APs located on the WAN. Determines whether the web admin portal can be accessed through HTTP or HTTPS Determines the port at which the management UI can be accessed. Redirects HTTP request to HTTPS Determines the username to be used for logging into the web admin portal Determines the password for the web admin portal on external AP. https://www.peplink.com 184 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 11.2 AP Controller Status 11.2.1 Info A comprehensive overview of your AP can be accessed by navigating to AP > Info . AP Controller License Limit This field displays the maximum number of AP your Balance router can control. You can purchase licenses to increase the number of AP you can manage. Frequency Underneath, there are two check boxes labeled 2.4 Ghz and 5 Ghz . Clicking either box will toggle the display of information for that frequency. By default, the graphs display the number of clients and data usage for both 2.4GHz and 5 GHz frequencies. SSID The colored boxes indicate the SSID to display information for. Clicking any colored box will toggle the display of information for that SSID. By default, all the graphs show information for all SSIDs. No. of APs This pie chart and table indicates how many APs are online and how many are offline. No.of Clients This graph displays the number of clients connected to each network at any given time. Mouse over any line on the graph to see how many clients connected to a specific SSID for that point in time. https://www.peplink.com 185 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Data Usage This graph enables you to see the data usage of any SSID for any given time period. Mouse over any line on the graph to see the data usage by each SSID for that point in time. Use the buttons next to Zoom to select the time scale you wish to view. In addition, you could use the sliders at the bottom to further refine your timescale. 11.2.2 Access Points (Usage) A detailed breakdown of data usage for each AP is available at AP> Access Point . Usage AP Name/Serial Number This field enables you to quickly find your device if you know its name or serial number. Fill in the field to begin searching. Partial names and serial numbers are supported. Online Status This button toggles whether your search will include offline devices. This table shows the detailed information on each AP, including channel, number of clients, upload traffic, and download traffic. Click the blue arrows at the left of the table to expand and collapse information on each device group. You could also expand and collapse all groups by using the buttons. On the right of the table, you will see the following icons:
. Click the icon to see a usage table for each client:
Managed Wireless Devices Click the icon to configure each client https://www.peplink.com 186 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink For easier network management, you can give each client a name and designate its location. You can also designate which firmware pack (if any) this client will follow, as well as the channels on which the client will broadcast. Click the icon to see a graph displaying usage:
Click any point in the graphs to display detailed usage and client information for that device, using that SSID, at that point in time. On the Data Usage by menu, you can display the information by SSID or by AP send/receive rate. Click the Event tab next to Wireless Usage to view a detailed event log for that particular device:
https://www.peplink.com 187 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 188 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 11.2.3 Wireless SSID In-depth wireless SSID reports are available under AP > Wireless SSID . Click the blue arrow on any SSID to obtain more detailed usage information on each SSID. 11.2.4 Wireless Client You can search for specific Wi-Fi users by navigating to AP > Wireless Client . Here, you will be able to see your networks heaviest users as well as search for specific users. icon for additional details about Click the each user:
icon to bookmark specific users, and click the https://www.peplink.com 189 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 190 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 11.2.5 Mesh / WDS Mesh / WDS allows you to monitor the status of your wireless distribution system (WDS) or Mesh, and track activity by MAC address by navigating to AP > Controller Status > Mesh /
WDS . This table shows the detailed information of each AP, including protocol, transmit rate
(sent / received), signal strength, and duration. https://www.peplink.com 191 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 11.2.6 Nearby Device A listing of near devices can be accessed by navigating to AP > Controller Status > Nearby Device . Hovering over the device MAC address will result in a popup with information on how this device was detected. Click the icons and the device will be moved to the bottom table of identified devices. Nearby Devices 11.2.7 Event Log You can access the AP Controller Event log by navigating to AP > Controller Status > Event Log . https://www.peplink.com 192 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This event log displays all activity on your AP network, down to the client level. Use to filter box to search by MAC address, SSID, AP Serial Number, or AP Profile name. Click View Alerts to see only alerts, and click the More link for additional records. Events 11.3 Toolbox Additional tools for managing firmware packs, power adjustment, and channel assignment can be found at AP>Toolbox . Firmware Packs This is the first menu that will appear. Here, you can manage the firmware of your AP. Clicking on will display information regarding each firmware pack. To receive new firmware packs, you can either press to download new packs or you can press define which firmware pack is default. to manually upload a firmware pack. Press to https://www.peplink.com 193 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12 System Tab 12.1 System 12.1.1 Admin Security There are two types of user accounts available for accessing the web admin: admin and user . They represent two user levels: the admin level has full administrative access, while the user level is read-only. The user level can access only the device's status information; users cannot make any changes on the device. A web login session will be logged out automatically when it has been idle longer than the Web Session Timeout . Before the session expires, you may click the Logout button in the web admin to exit the session. 0 hours 0 minutes signifies an unlimited session time. This setting should be used only in special situations, as it will lower the system security level if users do not log out before closing the browser. The default is 4 hours, 0 minutes. For security reasons, after logging in to the web admin Interface for the first time, it is recommended to change the administrator password. Configuring the administration interface to be accessible only from the LAN can further improve system security. Administrative settings configuration is located at System>Admin Security . https://www.peplink.com 194 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Router Name This field allows you to define a name for this Pepwave router. By default, Router Name is set as MAX_XXXX , where XXXX refers to the last 4 digits of the units serial number. Admin Settings Admin User Name Admin Password Confirm Admin Password Read-only User Name Admin User Name is set as admin by default, but can be changed, if desired. This field allows you to specify a new administrator password. This field allows you to verify and confirm the new administrator password. Read-only User Name is set as user by default, but can be changed, if desired. User Password This field allows you to specify a new user password. Once the user password is set, the read-only user feature will be enabled. https://www.peplink.com 195 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Confirm User Password This field allows you to verify and confirm the new user password. Web Session Timeout This field specifies the number of hours and minutes that a web session can remain idle before the Pepwave router terminates its access to the web admin interface. By default, it is set to 4 hours . Authentication by RADIUS With this box is checked, the web admin will authenticate using an external RADIUS server. Authenticated users are treated as either "admin" with full read-write permission or user with read-only access. Local admin and user accounts will be disabled. When the device is not able to communicate with the external RADIUS server, local accounts will be enabled again for emergency access. Additional authentication options will be available once this box is checked. Auth Protocol This specifies the authentication protocol used. Available options are MS-CHAP v2 and PAP . Auth Server Auth Server Secret This specifies the access address and port of the external RADIUS server. This field is for entering the secret key for accessing the RADIUS server. Auth Timeout This option specifies the time value for authentication timeout. Accounting Server Accounting Server Secret Network Connection CLI SSH CLI SSH Access This specifies the access address and port of the external accounting server. This field is for entering the secret key for accessing the accounting server. This option is for specifying the network connection to be used for authentication. Users can choose from LAN, WAN, and VPN connections. The CLI (command line interface) can be accessed via SSH. This field enables CLI support. For additional information regarding CLI, please refer to Section 15.3. This menu allows you to choose between granting access to LAN and WAN clients, or to LAN clients only. CLI SSH Port This field determines the port on which clients can access CLI SSH. CLI SSH Login Grace Time CLI SSH Access Public Key Security This option specifies the time for CLI SSH login. The default value is 120. This field is for entering the Public Key for Admin Users and Read-only Users to access CLI SSH. This option is for specifying the protocol(s) through which the web admin interface can be accessed:
HTTP https://www.peplink.com 196 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink HTTPS HTTP/HTTPS Web Admin Port Web Admin Access HTTP to HTTPS redirection is enabled by default to force HTTPS access to the web admin interface. This field is for specifying the port number on which the web admin interface can be accessed. This option is for specifying the network interfaces through which the web admin interface can be accessed:
LAN only LAN/WAN If LAN/WAN is chosen, the WAN Connection Access Settings form will be displayed. LAN Connection Access Settings Allowed LAN Networks This field allows you to permit only specific networks or VLANs to access the Web UI. Allowed Source IP Subnets WAN Connection Access Settings This field allows you to restrict web admin access only from defined IP subnets. Any - Allow web admin accesses to be from anywhere, without IP address restriction. Allow access from the following IP subnets only - Restrict web admin access only from the defined IP subnets. When this is chosen, a text input area will be displayed beneath:
The allowed IP subnet addresses should be entered into this text area. Each IP subnet must be in form of w.x.y.z/m , where w.x.y.z is an IP address (e.g., 192.168.0.0 ), and m is https://www.peplink.com 197 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink the subnet mask in CIDR format, which is between 0 and 32 inclusively (For example, 192.168.0.0/24 ). To define multiple subnets, separate each IP subnet one in a line. For example:
192.168.0.0/24 10.8.0.0/16 This is to choose which WAN IP address(es) the web server should listen on. Allowed WAN IP Address(es) 12.1.2 Firmware Upgrading firmware can be done in one of three ways. Using the routers interface to automatically check for an update, using the routers interface to manually upgrade the firmware, or using InControl2 to push an upgrade to a router. The automatic upgrade can be done from System > Firmware . If an update is found the buttons will change to allow you to Download and Update the firmware. Click on the Download and Upgrade button. A prompt will be displayed advising to download the Current Active Configuration. Please click on the underlined download text. After downloading the current config click the Ok button to start the upgrade process. The router will download and then apply the firmware. The time that this process takes will depend on your internet connections speed. The firmware will now be applied to the router*. The amount of time it takes for the firmware to upgrade will also depend on the router thats being upgraded. https://www.peplink.com 198 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
*Upgrading the firmware will cause the router to reboot. Web admin interface: install updates manually In some cases, a special build may be provided via a ticket or it may be found in the forum. Upgrading to the special build can be done using this method, or using IC2 if you are using that to manage your firmware upgrades. A manual upgrade using the GA firmware posted on the site may also be recommended or required for a couple of reasons. All of the Peplink/Pepwave GA firmware can be found here Navigate to the relevant product line
(ie. Balance, Max, FusionHub, SOHO, etc). Some product lines may have a dropdown that lists all of the products in that product line. Here is a screenshot from the Balance line. If the device has more than one firmware version the current hardware revision will be required to know what firmware to download. Navigate to System > Firmware and click the Choose File button under the Manual Firmware Upgrade section. Navigate to the location that the firmware was downloaded to select the .img file and click the Open button. Click on the Manual Upgrade button to start the upgrade process. A prompt will be displayed advising to download the Current Active Configuration. Please click on the underlined download text. After downloading the current config click the Ok button to https://www.peplink.com 199 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink start the upgrade process. The firmware will now be applied to the router*. The amount of time it takes for the firmware to upgrade will depend on the router thats being upgraded.
*Upgrading the firmware will cause the router to reboot. The InControl method Described in this knowledgebase article on our forum. 12.1.3 Time The time server functionality enables the system clock of the Peplink Balance to be synchronized with a specified time server. The settings for time server configuration are located at System>Time . Time Settings Time Zone This specifies the time zone (along with the corresponding Daylight Savings Time scheme) in which Peplink Balance operates. The Time Zone value affects the time stamps in the event log of the Peplink Balance and e-mail notifications. Check Show all to show all time zone options. Time Server This setting specifies the NTP network time server to be utilized by the Peplink Balance. 12.1.4 Schedule Enable and disable different functions (such as WAN connections, outbound policy, and firewalls at different times, based on a user-scheduled configuration profile. The settings for this are https://www.peplink.com 200 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink located at System > Schedule Enable scheduling, and then click on your schedule name or on the New Schedule button to begin. Edit Schedule Profile Enabling Click this checkbox to enable this schedule profile. Note that if this is disabled, then any associated features will also have their scheduling disabled. Name Enter your desired name for this particular schedule profile. Schedule Click the drop-down menu to choose pre-defined schedules as your starting point. Please note that upon selection, previous changes on the schedule map will be deleted. Schedule Map Click on the desired times to enable features at that time period. You can hold your mouse for faster entry. https://www.peplink.com 201 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.1.5 Email Notication The email notification functionality of the Peplink Balance provides a system administrator with up-to-date information on network status. The settings for configuring email notification are found at System>Email Notification . Email Notification Settings Email Notification This setting specifies whether or not to enable email notification. If Enable is checked, the Peplink Balance will send email messages to system administrators when the WAN status changes or when new firmware is available. If Enable is not checked, email notification is disabled and the Peplink Balance will not send email messages. SMTP Server This setting specifies the SMTP server to be used for sending email. If the server requires authentication, check Require authentication . This setting specifies via a drop-down menu one of the following valid Connection Security:
Connection Security None STARTTLS SSL/TLS SMTP Port SMTP User Name /
Password This field is for specifying the SMTP port number. By default, this is set to 25 . If Connection Security is selected STARTTLS , the default port number will be set to 587 . If Connection Security is selected SSL/TLS , the default port number will be set to 465 . You may customize the port number by editing this field. This setting specifies the SMTP username and password while sending email. These options are shown only if Require authentication is checked in the SMTP Server setting. https://www.peplink.com 202 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Confirm SMTP Password Senders Email Address Recipients Email Address This field allows you to verify and confirm the new administrator password. This setting specifies the email address which the Peplink Balance will use to send its reports. This setting specifies the email address(es) to which the Peplink Balance will send email notifications. For multiple recipients, separate each email using the enter key. After you have finished setting up email notifications, you can click the Test Email Notification button to test the settings before saving. After Test Email Notification is clicked, you will see this screen to confirm the settings:
Click Send Test Notification to confirm. In a few seconds, you will see a message with detailed test results. https://www.peplink.com 203 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 204 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.1.6 Event Log Event log functionality enables event logging at a specified remote syslog server. The settings for configuring the remote system log can be found at System>Event Log . Remote Syslog Settings Remote Syslog This setting specifies whether or not to log events at the specified remote syslog server. Remote Syslog Host This setting specifies the IP address or hostname of the remote syslog server. Push Events The Peplink Balance can also send push notifications to mobile devices that have our Mobile Router Utility installed. Check the box to activate this feature. URL Logging URL Logging Host Session Logging Session Logging Host This setting is to enable event logging at the specified log server. This setting specifies the IP address or hostname of the URL log server. This setting is to enable event logging at the specified log server. This setting specifies the IP address or hostname of the Session log server. For more information on the Router Utility, go to: www.peplink.com/products/router-utility https://www.peplink.com 205 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.1.7 SNMP SNMP or simple network management protocol is an open standard that can be used to collect information about the Peplink Balance unit. SNMP configuration is located at System>SNMP . SNMP Settings SNMP Device Name This field shows the router name defined at System>Admin Security . SNMP Port This option specifies the port which SNMP will use. The default port is 161 . SNMPv1 SNMPv2 SNMPv3 This option allows you to enable SNMP version 1. This option allows you to enable SNMP version 2. This option allows you to enable SNMP version 3. SNMP Trap This option allows you to enable SNMP Trap. If enabled, the following entry fields will https://www.peplink.com 206 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink appear. This setting specifies the SNMP Trap community name. Enter the IP address of the SNMP Trap server SNMP Trap Community SNMP Trap Server SNMP Trap Port This option specifies the port which the SNMP Trap server will use. The default port is 162 . SNMP Trap Server Heartbeat This option allows you to enable and configure the heartbeat interval for the SNMP Trap server. To add a community for either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2, click the Add SNMP Community button in the Community Name table, upon which the following screen is displayed:
SNMP Community Settings This setting specifies the SNMP community name. This setting specifies a subnet from which access to the SNMP server is allowed. Enter subnet address here (e.g., 192.168.1.0 ) and select the appropriate subnet mask. Community Name Allowed Source Subnet Address To define a user name for SNMPv3, click Add SNMP User in the SNMPv3 User Name table, upon which the following screen is displayed:
https://www.peplink.com 207 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink User Name This setting specifies a user name to be used in SNMPv3. SNMPv3 User Settings Authentication Protocol This setting specifies via a drop-down menu one of the following valid authentication protocols:
NONE MD5 SHA When MD5 or SHA is selected, an entry field will appear for the password. This setting specifies via a drop-down menu one of the following valid privacy protocols:
Privacy Protocol NONE DES When DES is selected, an entry field will appear for the password. 12.1.8 SMS Control SMS Control allows the user to control the device using SMS even if the modem does not have a data connection. The settings for configuring the SMS Control can be found at System>SMS Control . Note: Supported Models Balance/MAX : *-LTE-E, *-LTEA-W, *-LTEA-P, *-LTE-MX EPX : *-LW*, *-LP*
When this box is checked, the device will be allowed to take actions according to received commands via SMS. Make sure your mobile plan supports SMS, and note that some plans may incur additional charges for this. SMS Control can reboot devices and configure cellular settings over signalling channels, even if the modem does not have an active data connection. For details of supported SMS command sets, please refer to our knowledge base . https://www.peplink.com 208 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Enable Click the checkbox to enable the SMS Control. SMS Control Settings Password This setting sets the password for authentication - maximum of 32 characters, which cannot include semicolon (;). White List Optionally, you can add phone number(s) to the whitelist. Only matching phone numbers are allowed to issue SMS commands. Phone numbers must be in the E.164 International Phone Numbers format. https://www.peplink.com 209 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.1.9 InControl InControl is a cloud-based service which allows you to manage all of your Peplink and Pepwave devices with one unified system. With it, you can generate reports, gather statistics, and configure your devices automatically. All of this is now possible with InControl. When this checkbox is checked, the device's status information will be sent to the Peplink InControl system. This device's usage data and configuration will be sent to the system if you enable the features in the system. When the box Restricted to Status Reporting Only is ticked, the router will only report its status, but cant be managed or configured by InControl. Alternatively, you can also privately host InControl. Simply check the Privately Host InControl box and enter the IP Address of your InControl Host. If you have multiple hosts, you may enter the primary and backup IP addresses for the InControl Host and tick the Fail over to InControl in the cloud box. The device will connect to either the primary InControl Host or the secondary/backup ICA/IC2. You can sign up for an InControl account at https://incontrol2.peplink.com/ . You can register your devices under the account, monitor their status, see their usage reports, and receive offline notifications. https://www.peplink.com 210 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.1.10 Conguration Backing up Peplink Balance settings immediately after successful completion of initial setup is strongly recommended. The functionality to download and upload Peplink Balance settings is found at System>Configuration . Restore Configuration to Factory Settings Download Active Configurations Upload Configurations Upload Configurations from High Availability Pair Configuration The Restore Factory Settings button is to reset the configuration to factory default settings. After clicking the button, you will need to click the Apply Changes button on the top right corner to make the settings effective. Click Download to backup the current active settings. To restore or change settings based on a configuration file, click Choose File to locate the configuration file on the local computer, and then click Upload . The new settings can then be applied by clicking the Apply Changes button on the page header, or you can cancel the procedure by pressing discard on the main page of the web admin interface. In a high availability (HA) configuration, the Balance unit can quickly load the configuration of its HA counterpart. To do so, click the Upload button. After loading the settings, configure the LAN IP address of the Peplink Balance unit so that it is different from the HA counterpart. https://www.peplink.com 211 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.1.11 Feature Add-ons Some balance models have features that can be activated upon purchase. Once the purchase is complete, you will receive an activation key. Enter the key in the Activation Key field, click Activate , and then click Apply Changes . 12.1.12 Reboot This page provides a reboot button for restarting the system. For maximum reliability, the Peplink Balance Series can be equipped with two copies of firmware, and each copy can be a different version. You can select the firmware version you would like to reboot the device with. The firmware marked with (Running) is the current system boot up firmware. Please note that a firmware upgrade will always replace the inactive firmware partition. https://www.peplink.com 212 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.2 Tools 12.2.1 Ping The ping test tool sends pings through a specific Ethernet interface or a SpeedFusion TM VPN connection. You can specify the number of pings in the field Number of times to a maximum number of 10 times. Packet Size can be set to a maximum of 1472 bytes. The ping utility is located at System>Tools>Ping , illustrated below:
A system administrator can use the ping utility to manually check the connectivity of a particular LAN/WAN connection. Tip https://www.peplink.com 213 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.2.2 Traceroute The traceroute test tool traces the routing path to the destination through a particular Ethernet interface at System>Tools>Traceroute . SpeedFusion TM connection. traceroute located utility The test or is a A system administrator can use the traceroute utility to analyze the connection path of a LAN/WAN connection. Tip 12.2.3 Wake-on-LAN Peplink routers can send special magic packets to any client specified from the Web UI. To access this feature, navigate to System > Tools > Wake-on-LAN Select a client from the drop-down list and click Send to send a magic packet https://www.peplink.com 214 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.2.4 WAN Analysis The WAN Analysis feature allows you to run a WAN to WAN speed test between 2 Peplink devices . You can set a device up as a Server or a Client . One device must be set up as a server to run the speed tests and the server must have a public IP address. The default port is 6000 and can be changed if required. The IP address of the WAN interface will be shown in the WAN Connection Status section. https://www.peplink.com 215 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The client side has a few more settings that can be changed. Make sure that the Control Port matches whats been entered on the server side. Select the WAN(s) that will be used for testing and enter the Servers WAN IP address. Once all of the options have been set, click the Start Test button. https://www.peplink.com 216 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The test output will show the Data Streams Parameters , the Throughput as a graph, and the Results . The test can be run again once its complete by clicking the Start button or you can click Close and change the parameters for the test. https://www.peplink.com 217 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12.3 CLI (Command Line) Support The serial console connector on some Peplink Balance units is RJ-45. To access the serial console port, prepare a RJ-45 to DB-9 console cable. Connect the RJ-45 end to the unit's console port and the DB-9 end to a terminal's serial port. The port setting will be 115200,8N1 . The serial console connector on other Peplink Balance units is a DB-9 male connector. To access the serial console port, connect a null modem cable with a DB-9 connector on both ends to a terminal with the port setting of 115200,8N1 . https://www.peplink.com 218 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13 Status Tab 13.1 Status 13.1.1 Device System information is located at Status>Device . https://www.peplink.com 219 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Router Name This is the name specified in the Router Name field located at System>Admin Security . System Information Model Hardware Revision This shows the model name and number of this device. This shows the hardware version of this device. Serial Number This shows the serial number of this device. Firmware Uptime This shows the firmware version this device is currently running. This shows the length of time since the device has been rebooted. System Time This shows the current system time. Diagnostic Report Remote Assistance The Download link is for exporting a diagnostic report file required for system investigation. Click Turn on to enable remote assistance. The second table shows the MAC address of each LAN/WAN interface connected. Important Note If you encounter issues and would like to contact the Peplink Support Team ( http://www.peplink.com/contact/ ), please download the diagnostic report file and attach it along with a description of your issue. https://www.peplink.com 220 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13.1.2 Active Sessions Information on active sessions can be found at Status>Active Sessions>Overview . This screen displays the number of sessions initiated by each application. Click on each service listing for additional information. This screen also indicates the number of sessions initiated by each WAN port. Finally, you can see which clients are initiating the most sessions. https://www.peplink.com 221 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink In addition, you can also perform a filtered search for specific sessions. You can filter by subnet, port, Status>Active Sessions>Search . interface. protocol, navigate perform search, and To to a This Active Sessions section displays the active inbound / outbound sessions of each WAN connection on the Peplink Balance. A filter is available to help sort out the active session information. Enter a keyword in the field or check one of the WAN connection boxes for filtering. https://www.peplink.com 222 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13.1.3 Client List The client list table is located at Status>Client List . It lists DHCP and online client IP addresses, type, names (retrieved from the DHCP reservation table or defined by users), current download and upload rate, and MAC address. Clients can be imported into the DHCP reservation table by clicking the right. Further update the record after the import by going to Network>LAN . button on the If the PPTP server SpeedFusion TM , or AP controller is enabled, you may see the corresponding connection name listed in the Name field. In the client list table, there is a Ban Client feature which is used to disconnect the Wi-Fi and Remote User Access clients by clicking the button on the right. There is a blocklist on the same page after you banned the Wi-Fi or Remote User Access clients. https://www.peplink.com 223 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink You may also unblock the Wi-Fi or Remote User Access clients when the client devices need to reconnect the network by clicking the button on the right. 13.1.4 WINS Clients The WINS client list table is located at Status>WINS Client . The WINS client table lists the IP addresses and names of WINS clients. This option will only be available when you have enabled the WINS server The names of clients retrieved will be automatically matched into the Client List (see previous section). Click Flush All to flush all WINS client records. 13.1.5 OSPF & RIPv2 Information on OSPF and RIPv2 routing setup can be found at Status>OSPF & RIPv2 . https://www.peplink.com 224 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13.1.6 MediaFast To get details on storage and bandwidth usage, select Status>MediaFast . https://www.peplink.com 225 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13.1.7 PepVPN / SpeedFusion Status PepVPN/SpeedFusion Status shows the current connection status of each connection profile and is displayed at Status> PepVPN/SpeedFusion. Click on the corresponding peer name to explore the WAN connection(s) status and subnet information of each VPN peer. https://www.peplink.com 226 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click the latency, and drop-rate information for each WAN connection. button for PepVPN/SpeedFusion chart displaying real-time throughput, https://www.peplink.com 227 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink When pressing the the following menu will appear:
button for a PepVPN/SpeedFusion Tunnel Bandwidth Test Tool, The connection information shows the details of the selected PepVPN profile, consisting of the Profile name, Router ID , Router Nam e and Serial Number of the remote router Advanced features for the PepVPN profile will also be shown when the More Information checkbox is selected. The WAN statistics show information about the local and remote WAN connections (when show Remote connections ) is selected. The available details are WAN Name, IP address and port used for the Speedfusion connection. Rx and Tx rates, Loss rate and Latency . Connections can be temporarily disabled by sliding the switch button next to a WAN connection to the left. The wan-to-wan connection disabled by the switch is temporary and will be re-enabled after 15 minutes without any action. This can be used when testing the PepVPN speed between two locations to see if there is interference or network congestion between certain WAN connections. https://www.peplink.com 228 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The PepVPN/SpeedFusion test configuration allows us to configure and perform thorough tests. This is usually done after the initial installation of the routers and in case there are problems with aggregation. Press the Start button to perform throughput test according to the configured options. If TCP is selected, 4 parallel streams will be generated to get the optimal results by default. This can be customized by selecting a different value of streams. Using more streams will typically get better results if the latency of the tunnel is high. https://www.peplink.com 229 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13.1.8 Event Log Event log information is located at Status>Event Log . Device Event Log The log section displays a list of events that have taken place on the Peplink Balance unit. Check Auto Refresh to refresh log entries automatically. Click the Clear Log button to clear the log. IPsec Event Log This section displays a list of events that have taken place within an IPsec VPN connection. https://www.peplink.com 230 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Check the box next to Auto Refresh and the log will be refreshed automatically. For an AP event log, navigate to AP > Info . 13.2 WAN Quality The Status > WAN Quality allows to show detailed information about each connected WAN connection. 13.3 Usage Reports This section shows the bandwidth usage statistics, located at Status > Bandwidth . Bandwidth usage at the LAN while the device is switched off (e.g., LAN bypass) is neither recorded nor shown. 13.3.1 Real-Time The Data transferred since installation table indicates how much network traffic has been processed by the device since the first bootup. The Data transferred since last reboot table indicates how much network traffic has been processed by the device since the last bootup. https://www.peplink.com 231 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 232 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13.3.2 Hourly This page shows the hourly bandwidth usage for all WAN connections, with the option of viewing each individual connection. Select the desired connection to check from the drop-down menu. 13.3.3 Daily This page shows the daily bandwidth usage for all WAN connections, with the option of viewing each individual connection. Select the connection to check from the drop-down menu. If you have enabled the Bandwidth Monitoring feature as shown in Section 13.4, the Current Billing Cycle table for that WAN connection will be displayed. Click on a date to view the client bandwidth usage of that specific date. This feature is not available if you have selected to view the bandwidth usage of only a particular WAN connection. The scale of the graph can be set to display megabytes ( MB ) or gigabytes ( GB ). https://www.peplink.com 233 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Status https://www.peplink.com 234 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click on a specific date to receive a breakdown of all client usage for that date. https://www.peplink.com 235 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13.3.4 Monthly This page shows the monthly bandwidth usage for each WAN connection. If you have enabled Bandwidth Monitoring feature as shown in Section 13.4 , you can check the usage of each particular connection and view the information by Billing Cycle or by Calendar Month . Click the first two rows to view the client bandwidth usage in the last two months. This feature is not available if you have chosen to view the bandwidth of an individual WAN connection. The scale of the graph can be set to display megabytes ( MB ) or gigabytes ( GB ). Click on a specific month to receive a breakdown of all client usage for that month. https://www.peplink.com 236 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Appendix Appendix A. Restoration of Factory Defaults To restore the factory default settings on a Peplink Balance unit, perform the following:
For Balance models with a reset button:
1. 2. Locate the reset button on the Peplink Balance unit. With a paperclip, press and keep the reset button pressed. Hold for 5-10 seconds for admin password reset (Note: The LED status light blinks in RED 2 times and release the button, green status light starts blinking) Hold for approximately 20 seconds for factory reset (Note: The LED status light blinks in RED 3 times and release the button, all WAN/LAN port lights start blinking) After the Peplink Balance router finishes rebooting, the factory default settings will be restored. For Balance/MediaFast models with an LCD menu:
on Use front Maintenance > Factory Defaults , and then choose Yes to confirm. buttons control panel the the the to LCD menu to go to Afterwards, the factory default settings will be restored. All previous configurations and bandwidth usage data will be lost after restoring factory default settings. Regular backup of configuration settings is strongly recommended. Important Note Appendix B. Routing under DHCP, Static IP, and PPPoE The information in this appendix applies only to situations where the Peplink Balance operates a WAN connection under DHCP, Static IP, or PPPoE. B.1 Routing Via Network Address Translation (NAT) When the Peplink Balance is operating under NAT mode, the source IP addresses of outgoing IP packets are translated to the WAN IP address of the Peplink Balance. With NAT, all LAN devices share the same WAN IP address to access the Internet (i.e., the WAN IP address of the Peplink Balance). Operating the Peplink Balance in NAT mode requires only one WAN (Internet) IP address. In addition, operating in NAT mode also has security advantages because LAN devices are hidden behind the Peplink Balance. They are not directly accessible from the Internet and hence less vulnerable to attacks. https://www.peplink.com 237 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The following figure shows the packet flow in NAT mode:
B.2 Routing Via IP Forwarding When the Peplink Balance is operating under IP forwarding mode, the IP addresses of IP packets are unchanged; the Peplink Balance forwards both inbound and outbound IP packets without changing their IP addresses. The following figure shows the packet flow in IP forwarding mode:
https://www.peplink.com 238 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 239 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Appendix C. FusionSIM Manual Peplink has developed a unique technology called FusionSIM, which allows SIM cards to remotely link to a cellular router. This can be done via cloud or within the same physical network. There are a few key scenarios to fit certain applications. The purpose of this manual is to provide an introduction on where to start and how to set up for the most common scenarios and uses. Requirements 1. A Cellular router that supports FusionSIM technology 2. SIM Injector 3. SIM card Notes:
Always check for the latest Firmware version for both the cellular router and the SIM Injector. You can also check for the latest Firmware version on the devices WEB configuration page. A list of products that support FusionSIM can be found on the SIM Injector WEB page . Please check under the section Supported models . SIM Injector reset and login details How to reset a SIM Injector:
Hold the reset button for 5-10 seconds. Once the LED status light turns RED, the reset button can be released. SIM Injector will reboot and start with the factory default settings. The default WEB login settings:
User : admin Password : admin IP address: the device only has a DHCP client and no fallback IP address. Therefore, it is advised to check every time what IP address is assigned to the SIM Injector. Notes:
The SIM Injector can be monitored via InControl 2. Configuration is not supported. https://www.peplink.com 240 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
1 2 3 | User Manual-4 | Users Manual | 4.03 MiB | October 27 2022 / April 27 2023 | delayed release |
Scenario 1: SIM Injector in LAN of Cellular Router Setup topology This is the most basic scenario in which the SIM Injector is connected directly to the cellular routers LAN port via an ethernet cable. This allows for the cellular router to be positioned for the best possible signal. Meanwhile, the SIM cards can be conveniently located in other locations such as the office, passenger area, or the bridge of a ship. The SIM Injector allows for easily swapping SIM cards without needing to access a cellular router. IMPORTANT: Cellular WAN will not fallback to the local SIM if it is configured to use the SIM Injector. Configuring the SIM Injector 1. Connect the SIM Injector to the LAN port of the cellular router. 2. Insert SIM cards into the SIM Injector. The SIM cards will be automatically detected. IMPORTANT: SIM cards inserted into SIM Injector must not have a PIN code. Note 1: The SIM Injector gets its IP address via DHCP and doesn't have a static IP address. To find its address, please check the DHCP lease on the cellular router. Configuring the Cellular Router https://www.peplink.com 241 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Step 1. Enable the SIM Injector communication protocol. 1a. If you are using a Balance cellular router, go to the Network tab (top navigation bar). 1b. If you are using a MAX cellular router, go to the Advanced tab (top navigation bar). 2. Under Misc. settings (left navigation bar) find Remote SIM Management . 3. In Remote SIM Management , click on the edit icon next to Remote SIM is Disabled . 4. Check the Auto LAN discovery checkbox and click Save and Apply Changes . 5. Click Save and then Apply Changes . Step 2. Enable RemoteSIM for the selected Cellular interface. 1. Go to Network (top navigation bar), then WAN (left navigation bar) and click Details for a page. selected Connection Settings cellular WAN. WAN open This the will 2. Scroll down to Cellular settings . 3. In the SIM Card section, select Use Remote SIM Only . 4. Enter configuration settings in Remote SIM Settings section. Click on Scan nearby remote SIM server to show the serial number(s) of the connected SIM Injector(s). Available configuration options for cellular interface are shown below:
https://www.peplink.com 242 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink A. Defining SIM Injector(s)
- Format: <S/N>
- Example 1: 1111-2222-3333
- Example 2: 1111-2222-3333 4444-5555-6666 B. Defining SIM Injector(s) SIM slot(s):
- Format: <S/N:slot number>
- Example 1: 1111-2222-3333:7,5 (the Cellular Interface will use SIM in slot 7, then 5)
- Example 2: 1111-2222-3333:1,2 1111-2222-3333:3,4 (the cellular Interface will use SIM in slot 1, then in 2 from the first SIM Injector, and then it will use 3 and 4 from the second SIM Injector). Note: It is recommended to use different SIM slots for each cellular interface. 5. Click Save and Apply Changes . Step 3. (Optional) Custom SIM cards settings. 1a. For a Balance router, go to the Network (Top tab). 1b. For a MAX router, go to the Advanced (Top tab). 2. Under Misc. settings (Left-side tab) find Remote SIM Management . 3. Click on the Add Remote SIM button, fill in all the required info and click Save . This section allows defining custom requirements for a SIM card located in a certain SIM slot:
Enable/Disable roaming (by default roaming is disabled). Add Custom mobile operator settings (APN, user name, password). 4. Repeat configuration for all SIM cards which need custom settings. 5. Click Apply Changes to take effect. Scenario 2: SIM Injector in WAN of main Router and multiple Cellular Routers https://www.peplink.com 243 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Setup topology In this scenario, each HD Dome creates a WAN connection to the main router. A single SIM Injector is used to provide SIM cards for each HD Dome. The HD Dome can be replaced with any Peplink cellular router supporting RemoteSIM technology. This scenario requires the completion of the configuration steps shown in Scenario 1 in addition to the configuration steps explained below. Additional configurations for Cellular Routers Step 1. Disable the DHCP server.
HD Dome 1 should act as a DHCP server. HD Dome 2 should be configured to have a static IP address with DHCP disabled. Both routers should be in the same subnet (e.g. 192.168.50.1 and 192.168.50.2). 1. Go to Network (Top tab), then Network Settings (Left-side tab), and click on Untagged LAN . This will open up the LAN settings page. 2. Change the IP address to 192.168.50.2. 3. In the DHCP Server section, uncheck the checkbox to disable DHCP Server. 4. Click Save and Apply Changes . https://www.peplink.com 244 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Step 2. Ethernet port configuration The Ethernet port must be set to ACCESS mode for each HD Dome. To do this, dummy VLANs need to be created first. 1. Go to Network (Top tab), then Network Settings (Left-side tab), and click on New LAN . This will open the settings page to create a dummy VLAN. 2. The image below shows the values that need to be changed to create a new VLAN:
Note : set different IP addresses for each HD dome (e.g. 192.168.10.1 and 192.168.10.2). 3. Click Save and Apply Changes . 4. Go to Network (Top tab), then Port Settings (Left-side tab). 5. Set the Port Type to Access and set VLAN to Untagged LAN (see picture below). 6. Click Save and Apply Changes . Configuration requirements for the main Router https://www.peplink.com 245 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Requirements for the main router are:
Configure WAN 1 as a DHCP client. WAN 1 will automatically get the Gateway IP address from HD Dome 1. Configure WAN 2 as a Static IP and set it to 192.168.50.12. Configure WAN 2 Gateway to 192.168.50.2. Same as the HD Dome 2s IP address. https://www.peplink.com 246 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Scenario 3: SIM Injector in LAN of main Router and multiple Cellular Routers Setup topology In this scenario, SIMs are provided to the HD Domes via the main router. In this example, the Remote SIM Proxy functionality needs to be enabled on the main router. Notes:
HD Dome can be replaced with any other cellular router that supports RemoteSIM. https://www.peplink.com 247 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
It is recommended to use Peplink Balance series or X series routers as the main router. This scenario requires the completion of the configuration steps for the cellular router and the SIM Injector as in Scenario 1. The configuration for the main router is explained below. Main Router configuration IMPORTANT: Main router LAN side and Cellular Routers must be configured using different subnets, e.g. 192.168. 50 .1/24 and 192.168. 100 .1/24. Note : please make sure the Peplink router is running Firmware 8.1.0 or above. 1. Open the main router WEB interface and change:
From <IP address>/cgi-bin/MANGA/ index.cgi to <IP address>/cgi-bin/MANGA/ support.cgi . This will open the support.cgi page. 2. Scroll down to find Remote SIM Proxy and click on [click to configure] that is located next to it. 3. Check the Enable checkbox. 4. Click on Save . 5. Go back to the index.cgi page and click on Apply Changes . https://www.peplink.com 248 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Scenario 4: SIM Injector in a remote location Setup topology Requirements for installing a SIM Injector in a remote location:
Cellular router communicates with the SIM Injector via UDP port 50000. Therefore this port must be reachable via public IP over the Internet. The one way latency between the cellular router and the SIM Injector should be up to 250 ms. A higher latency may lead to stability issues. The cellular router must have Internet connection to connect to the SIM Injector. It can be another Internet connection via Ethernet or Fiber if possible, or a secondary cellular interface with a local SIM (Ignite SIM). Due to its high latency, it is not recommended to use satellite WAN for connecting to a SIM Injector in remote locations. SIM Injector configuration is the same as in Scenario 1. Cellular Router configuration https://www.peplink.com 249 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Step 1. Enable the SIM Injector communication protocol. 1a. For a Balance cellular router, go to the Network (Top tab). 1b. For a MAX cellular router, go to the Advanced (Top tab). 2. Under Misc. settings (Left-side tab), find Remote SIM Management . 3. In Remote SIM Management , click on the edit icon next to Remote SIM is Disabled. 4. Enter the public IP of the SIM Injector and click Save and Apply Changes . Notes:
Do NOT check Auto LAN Discovery . Adding a SIM Injector serial number to the Remote SIM Host field is a mistake!
Step 2. RemoteSIM and custom SIM card settings configurations are the same as in Scenario 1. https://www.peplink.com 250 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink How to check if a Pepwave Cellular Router supports Remote SIM 1. Go to Network (Top tab), then WAN (Left-side tab), and click Details on any cellular WAN. This will open the WAN Connection Settings page. 2. Scroll down to Cellular settings . If you can see the Remote SIM Settings section, then the cellular router supports RemoteSIM. Monitor the status of the Remote SIM 1. Go to Network (Top tab), then WAN (Left-side tab), and click Details on the cellular WAN which was configured to use RemoteSIM. 2. Check the WAN Connection Status section. Within the cell WAN details, there is a section for Remote SIM (SIM card IMSI, SIM Injector serial number and SIM slot). https://www.peplink.com 251 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Appendix D. Case studies MPLS Alternative Our SpeedFusion enabled routers can be used to bond multiple low-cost/commodity Internet connections to replace an expensive managed business Internet connection, private leased line, MPLS, and frame relay without sacrificing reliability and availability. Below are typical deployments for using our Balance routers to replace expensive MPLS connections with commodity connections, such as ADSL, 3G, and 4G LTE links. Special features of Balance 580: have high availability capability Special features of Balance 2500: have high availability capability and capable of connecting to optical fiber based LAN through SFP+ connector Our WAN-bonding routers which comprise our Balance series and MediaFast series are capable of connecting multiple devices, and end users networks to the Internet through multiple Internet connections. Our MediaFast series routers have been helping students at many education institutions to enjoy uninterrupted learning Option 1: MPLS Supplement https://www.peplink.com 252 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Affordably increase your bandwidth by adding commodity ADSL links to your MPLS connection. SpeedFusion technology bonds all your connections together, enabling session-persistent, user-transparent hot failover. QoS support, bandwidth control, and traffic prioritization gives you total control over your network. https://www.peplink.com 253 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Option 2: MPLS Alternative Achieve faster speeds and greater reliability while paying only 20% of MPLS costs by connecting multiple ADSL, 3G, and 4G LTE links. Choose a topology that suits your requirements: a hub-and-spoke topology maximizes control over your network, while a meshed topology can reduce your bandwidth overhead by enabling your devices to form Unbreakable VPN connections directly with each other. https://www.peplink.com 254 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Here is an example of to supplement of existing Multi-Office MPLS network with DSL bonding through SpeedFusion using a Balance 580 at the headquarters and Balance 210/310 at branch offices. Environment:
This organization has one head office with two branch offices, with most of the crucial information stored in a server room at the head office. They are connecting the offices together using a managed MPLS Solution. However, the MPLS Network is operating at capacity and upgrading the links is cost prohibitive. As the organization grows, it needs a cost-efficient way to add more bandwidth to its wide area network. Internet access at the remote sites is sent via a web proxy at head office for corporate web filtering compliance. Requirement:
User sessions need to remain uninterrupted More bandwidth is required at the head office location for direct internet access. Recommended Solution:
Form a SpeedFusion tunnel between the branch offices and head office to bond the MPLS and additional DSL lines. SpeedFusion allows for hot failover, maintaining a persistent session while switching connections. The DSLs at head office can be used for direct internet access providing lots of cheap internet bandwidth. Head office can use outbound policies to send internet traffic out over the DSLs and only use the MPLS connection for speedfusion, freeing up bandwidth.
https://www.peplink.com 255 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Devices Deployed : Balance 210, Balance 310, Balance 580 Harrington Industrial Plastics Overview Harrington Plastics, the USs largest industrial plastics distributor, was looking to upgrade its network equipment. Harringtons team came across Peplink and started thinking about MPLS alternatives. By choosing Peplink, they saved a fortune on upgrades and ended up with yearly savings of up to $100,000. Requirements
Zero network outages Flexible resilience options Cost-effective solution Solution
Peplink Balance 1350 Peplink Balance 380 Unbreakable VPN Benets
Extreme savings of $100,000 per year https://www.peplink.com 256 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
4x the bandwidth Seamless hardware failover Highly available network due to WAN diversity Highly cost-effective compared to competing solutions Easy resilience achieved by adding 4G USB modems Time For An Upgrade Harrington Industrial Plastics decided it was time to upgrade its network equipment. Its existing solution used redundant MPLS for site-to-site traffic and broadband connections for Internet access. Harrington is the USs largest distributor of industrial plastics piping, serving all industries with corrosive and high-purity applications. It requires peak performance at all times in order to serve its large customer base and 43 busy branches. Quick Deployment and Unbreakable Connectivity In evaluating an upgrade to its network infrastructure, it was only natural that Harrington settled on the best in the industry Peplink. Peplink partner Frontier Computer Corporation was chosen to help design and deploy the solution. Since Peplink gear is so easy to configure and install, Harrington was able to design, prototype and roll out the entire solution to the corporate headquarters and all 43 branches within just one year. https://www.peplink.com 257 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The corporate office houses a pair of redundant Balance 1350s for hardware resilience. Served by 4 separate links from multiple service providers, the networks chance of an outage is practically zero. All 43 branches are now equipped with a fleet of Balance 380s, bonding a combination of DSL, cable and fiber-optic links together with an additional 4G USB modem for added resilience. These work together to create an Unbreakable VPN connection to the Balance 1350s at the corporate office, connecting the final dot. Dependable, Resilient Networking thats also Very Budget-friendly https://www.peplink.com 258 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Harrington Industrial Plastics couldnt be happier. They now benefit from an extremely reliable and cost-effective network. Supplying additional resilience is as easy as plugging in a 4G USB modem. Where the MPLS 768kb deployed previously had cost them $192000 a year for all 40 sites, their new solution is now only costing them $92000. Their total bandwidth has been bumped from 36 Mbps to 138 Mbps. PLUSS Peplink + Citrix + VoIP Adds Up to Fast, Cost-Effective WAN for Pluss A Peplink customer since 2006, Pluss is a social enterprise that each year makes gainful employment a reality for more than 5000 disabled and disadvantaged UK citizens. With 37 locations and 300+ active users, Pluss makes heavy use of its WAN infrastructure, which until recently was built on managed MPLS lines. Hoping to cut expenses and, if possible, boost performance at the same time, Steve Taylor, IT Manager at Pluss, set out to find a solution that would allow Pluss to replace costly MPLS service with a commodity alternative, such as DSL or EFM. Steve found the solution Pluss needed in Peplink products, especially the Balance series of https://www.peplink.com 259 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink high-performance enterprise routers and SpeedFusion bonding technology. Pluss now powers its entire WAN infrastructure with simple-to-install, highly reliable, and cost-effective Peplink gear, which allows it to aggregate DSL and other commodity connections and replace expensive leased lines. Colgio Next - Enabling eLearning Colgio Next, a recognized Apple Distinguished School - deploys over 500 iPads to its 600 students as a teaching and learning tool. Despite being equipped with iPads, teachers and students alike were not making use of them. The reason for this was because of the slow network access speeds. Apps would not download https://www.peplink.com 260 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink and course contents were inaccessible. Often, having more than a couple students connected to the same Wi-Fi access point was enough to bring it to its knees. Colgio Next needed a unique solution, so they contacted Peplink. Requirements
Solve network congestion problem caused by 600 students over rural Internet connections
Wi-Fi that can handle 50+ users per classroom An affordable network infrastructure that can provide simultaneous access to media-rich educational content Solution
Peplink MediaFast Multi-WAN Content-caching router, tailor-made for Education networking. AP One 300M Enterprise grade AP, 5GHz Wi-Fi, up to 60 concurrent users. Benets
Instant, simultaneous access to media-rich educational content for 500+ iPads
Wi-Fi connection stability for 50+ users per classroom, not achievable by other tested equipment Teachers, students and guests can be assigned access priority to available bandwidth, further preventing congestion iOS updates (often 2GB size) no longer congest the network as they are downloaded only once, cached on the MediaFast and then distributed to all iOS devices AP Controller makes MAC Address Filtering easy. Students are assigned to designated APs by their devices' MAC Address in order to prevent saturating any single AP. Flawless iPad AirPlay mirroring at all times iPads are used all day, reaching their full potential with a fast and stable network all the time Students are far more engaged and teachers rely on their iPads all day https://www.peplink.com 261 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 262 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Performance Optimization Scenario In this scenario, email and web browsing are the two main Internet services used by LAN users. The mail server is external to the network. The connections are ADSL (WAN1, with slow uplink and fast downlink) and Metro Ethernet (WAN2, symmetric). Solution For optimal performance with this configuration, individually set the WAN load balance according to the characteristics of each service. Web browsing mainly downloads data; sending emails mainly consumes upload bandwidth. Both connections offer good download speeds; WAN2 offers good upload speeds. Define WAN1 and WAN2's inbound and outbound bandwidths to be 30M/2M and 50M/50M, respectively. This will ensure that outbound traffic is more likely to be routed through WAN2. For HTTP, set the weight to 3:4. For SMTP, set the weight to 1:8, such that users will have a greater chance to be routed via WAN2 when sending email. Maintaining the Same IP Address Throughout a Session Scenario Some IP address-sensitive websites (for example, Internet banking) use both client IP address and cookie matching for session identification. Since load balancing uses different IP addresses, the session is dropped when a mismatched IP is detected, resulting in frequent interruptions while visiting such sites. Solution Make use of the persistence functionality of the Peplink Balance. With persistence configured and the By Destination option selected, the Peplink Balance will use a consistent WAN connection for source-destination pairs of IP addresses, preventing sessions from being dropped. With persistence configured and the option By Source is selected, the Peplink Balance uses a consistent WAN connection for same-source IP addresses. This option offers higher application compatibility but may inhibit the load balancing function unless there are many clients using the Internet. Settings Set persistence in at Advanced>Outbound Policy . https://www.peplink.com 263 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click Add Rule , select HTTP (TCP port 80) for web service, and select Persistence . Click Save and then Apply Changes , located at the top right corner, to complete the process. A network administrator can use the traceroute utility to manually analyze the connection path of a particular WAN connection. Tip Bypassing the Firewall to Access Hosts on LAN Scenario There are times when remote access to computers on the LAN is desirable; for example, when hosting web sites, online businesses, FTP download and upload areas, etc. In such cases, it may be appropriate to create an inbound NAT mapping for the network to allow some hosts on the LAN to be accessible from outside of the firewall. Solution The web admin interface can be used to add an inbound NAT mapping to a host and to bind the host to the WAN connection(s) of your choice. To begin, navigate to Network>NAT Mappings . In this example, the host with an IP address of 192.168.1.102 is bound to 10.90.0.75 of WAN1:
https://www.peplink.com 264 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click Save and then Apply Changes , located at the top right corner, to complete the process. Inbound Access Restriction Scenario A firewall is required in order to protect the network from potential hacker attacks and other Internet security threats. Solution Firewall functionality is built into the Peplink Balance. By default, inbound access is unrestricted. Enabling a basic level of protection involves setting up firewall rules. For example, in order to protect your private network from external access, you can set up a firewall rule between the Internet and your private network. To do so, navigate to Network>Firewall>Access Rules . Then click the Add Rule button in the Inbound Firewall Rules table and change the settings according to the following screenshot:
https://www.peplink.com 265 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink After the fields have been entered as in the screenshot, click Save to add the rule. Afterwards, change the default inbound rule to Deny by clicking the default rule in the Inbound Firewall Rules table. Click Apply Changes on the top right corner to complete the process. Outbound Access Restriction Scenario For security reasons, it may be appropriate to restrict outbound access. For example, you may want to prevent LAN users from using ftp to transfer files to and from the Internet. This can easily be achieved by setting up an outbound firewall rule with the Peplink Balance. Solution To setup a firewall between the Internet and private network for outbound access, navigate to Network>Firewall>Access Rules . Click the Add Rule button in the Outbound Firewall Rules table, and then adjust settings according the screenshot:
https://www.peplink.com 266 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink After the fields have been entered as in the screenshot, click Save to add the rule. Click Apply Changes on the top right corner to complete the process. https://www.peplink.com 267 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Appendix E. Overview of ports used by Peplink SD-WAN routers and other Peplink services Default Number Port Usage UDP 5246 Data flow TCP 443 HTTPS service Service InControl InControl TCP 5246 Optional, TCP 443 responding used when not is InControl Inbound/Outbound Outbound Outbound Default Status Enabled Enabled Outbound Enabled TCP 5246 Remote Web Admin InControl Appliance Virtual Outbound TCP 4500 VPN Data (TCP Mode) PepVPN SpeedFusion TCP 32015 VPN handshake UDP 4500 VPN Data UDP 32015 VPN Data (alternative) PepVPN SpeedFusion PepVPN SpeedFusion PepVPN SpeedFusion TCP/UDP 4500+N-1^
UDP 32015+N-1^
VPN Data Sub-Tunnels PepVPN SpeedFusion VPN Data (alternative) Sub-Tunnels PepVPN SpeedFusion UDP 4500 VPN Data IPsec UDP 500 VPN initiation IPsec
Inbound Outbound*
Inbound Outbound*
Inbound
Outbound*
Inbound Outbound*
Inbound Outbound*
Inbound
Outbound*
Inbound Outbound*
Inbound Outbound*
L2TP L2TP L2TP Remote User Access Inbound Remote User Access Inbound Remote User Access Inbound OpenVPN Remote User Access Inbound PPTP (GRE) Remote User Access Inbound UDP 500 UDP 1701 UDP 4500 UDP 1194 IP 47 TCP 2222 Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Remote Direct connection Assistance Peplink Troubleshooting Assistance Outbound Enabled TCP 80 HTTP traffic Web Admin Interface Inbound Enabled https://www.peplink.com 268 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink TCP 443 HTTPS traffic TCP 8822 SSH UDP 161 UDP 162 SNMP Get SNMP Trap access Web Admin Interface access (secure) Inbound SSH Inbound SNMP monitoring Inbound SNMP monitoring Outbound TCP, UDP 1812 Radius Authentication Radius TCP, UDP 1813 Radius Accounting Radius UDP 123 Network Time Protocol NTP TCP 60660 Real-time location data in NMEA format GPS Disclaimer:
Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Outbound Outbound Inbound Outbound Outbound Disabled By default, only TCP 32015 and UDP 4500 are needed for PepVPN / SpeedFusion. Inbound / Outbound* - Inbound = For Server mode; Outbound = For Client mode UDP 32015 - If IPsec VPN or L2TP/IPsec RUA is enabled, the UDP 4500 is occupied, so PepVPN / SpeedFusion will automatically switch to UPD 32015 as VPN data port . UDP 32015+N-1^ / TCP/UDP 4500+N-1^ - When using Sub-Tunnels, multiple ports are in use (1 for each Sub-Tunnel profile). The default UDP data ports used when using (N number of Sub-Tunnel profiles) are:
45004500+N-1, or (when port 4500 is in use by IPsec or L2TP/IPsec) 32015 32015+N-1". https://www.peplink.com 269 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Appendix F. Troubleshooting Problem 1 Outbound load is only distributed over one WAN connection. Solution Outbound load balancing can only be distribute traffic evenly between available WAN connections if many outbound connections are made. If there is only one user on the LAN and only one download session is made from his/her browser, the WAN connections cannot be fully utilized. For a single user, download management applications are recommended. The applications can split a file into pieces and download the pieces simultaneously. Examples include: DownThemAll
(Firefox Extension), iGetter (Mac), etc. If the outbound traffic is going across the SpeedFusion TM tunnel, (i.e., transferring a file to a VPN peer) the bandwidth of all WAN connections will be bonded. In this case, all bandwidth will be utilized and a file will be transferred across all available WAN connections. For additional details, please refer to this FAQ:
https://forum.peplink.com/t/speed-test-tool-for-combined-download-speed-in-multi-wan-environ ment/8457 Problem 2 I am using a download manager program (e.g., Download Accelerator Plus, DownThemAll, etc.). Why is the download speed still only that of a single link?
Solution First, check whether all WAN connections are up. Second, ensure your download manager application has split the file into 3 parts or more. It is also possible that all of 2 or even 3 download sessions were being distributed to the same link by chance. Problem 3 I am using some websites to look up my public IP address, e.g., www.whatismyip.com . When I press the browser's Refresh button, the server almost always returns the same address. Isnt the IP address supposed to be changing for every refresh?
Solution The web server has enabled the Keep Alive function, which ensures that you use the same TCP session to query the server. Try to test with a website that does not enable Keep Alive . Problem 4 What can I do if I suspect a problem on my LAN connection?
Solution You can test the LAN connection using ping. For example, if you are using DOS/Windows, at https://www.peplink.com 270 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink the command prompt, type ping 192.168.1.1. This pings the Peplink Balance device (provided that Peplink Balances IP is 192.168.1.1) to test whether the connection to the Peplink Balance is OK. Problem 5 What can I do if I suspect a problem on my Internet/WAN connection?
Solution You can test the WAN connection using ping, as in the solution to Problem 4. As we want to isolate the problems from the LAN, ping will be performed from the Peplink Balance. By using Ping / Traceroute under the Status tab of the Peplink Balance, you may able to find the source of problem. Problem 6 When I upload files to a server via FTP, the transfer stalls after a few kilobytes of data are sent. What should I do?
Solution The maximum transmission unit (MTU) or MSS setting may need to be adjusted. By default, the MTU is set at 1440. Choose Auto for all of your WAN connections. If that does not solve the problem, you can try the MTU 1492 if a connection is DSL. If problem still persists, change the size to progressive smaller values until your problem is resolved (e.g., 1462, 1440, 1420, 1400, etc). Additional troubleshooting resources:
Peplink Community Forums: https://forum.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 271 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Appendix G. FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For Balance 30 Pro Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. FCC Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Radiation Exposure Statement :
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 49 cm between the radiator and your body. Note The country code selection is for non-US models only and is not available to all US models. Per FCC regulation, all WiFi products marketed in US must fixed to US operation channels only. Battery Caution Statement Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. https://www.peplink.com 272 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance 30 Pro ) https://www.peplink.com 273 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 274 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 19.93 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.88 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. Contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
https://www.peplink.com 275 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink For Balance one Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (Balance one) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio ex- empts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le https://www.peplink.com 276 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink brouillage est susceptible den
(i) The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potent for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems
(ii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band 5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(i) Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est reserve uniquement pour utilisation a l'interieur afin de reduire les risques de brouillage prejudiciable aux systemes de satellites mobiles utilisant les memes canaux
(ii) Le gain maximal d'antenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisan bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer a la limitation P.I.R.E specifiee pour l'exploitation point a point et non point a point, selon le cas. En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi etre avises que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont designes utilisateurs principaux (c.-a-d., qu'ils ont la priorite) pour les bande 5725-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Cet equipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED definies pour un environnement non controle. Cet equipement doit etre installe et utilise a une distance minimum de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. https://www.peplink.com 277 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance One ) https://www.peplink.com 278 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 16.59 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 21.38 dBm https://www.peplink.com 279 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 5GHz ( 5725 - 5850 MHz ) : 13.25 dBm This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. Contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 280 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink For Balance one core, Balance 20, Balance 30 LTE, Balance 210, Balance 310X, Balance 310X 5G, Balance 310 5G, Balance 310 Fiber 5G, Balance 305, Balance 380, Balance 580, Balance 710, Balance 1350, Balance 2500, EPX, Balance SDX, MediaFast 500, MediaFast 750 Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Radiation Exposure Statement (Balance 30 LTE, Balance 310X, Balance 310X 5G, Balance 310 5G, Balance 310 Fiber 5G) This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (Balance one core, Balance 20, Balance 30 LTE, Balance 310X, Balance 310X 5G, Balance 310 5G, Balance 310 Fiber 5G, Balance 305, Balance 380, Balance 580, Balance 710, Balance 1350, Balance 2500, EPX, Balance SDX, MediaFast 500, MediaFast 750) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le present produit est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Developpement economique Canada. For Balance 30 LTE, Balance 310X, Balance 310X 5G, Balance 310 5G, Balance 310 Fiber 5G This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
https://www.peplink.com 281 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den Radiation Exposure Statement (Balance 30 LTE, Balance 310X, Balance 310X 5G, Balance 310 5G, Balance 310 Fiber 5G) This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Cet quipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED dfinies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis une distance minimum de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. Battery Caution Statement (Balance 30 LTE, Balance 210, Balance 310 5G, Balance 310X, Balance 310X 5G, Balance 310 Fiber 5G, Balance SDX) Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Safety Statement (Balance SDX) Class I Equipment. This equipment must be earthed. The power plug must be connected to a properly wired earth ground socket outlet. An improperly wired socket outlet could place hazardous voltages on accessible metal parts. All Ethernet cables are designed for intra-building connection to other equipment. Do not connect these ports directly to communication wiring or other wiring that exits the building where the appliance is located. https://www.peplink.com 282 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For Balance Two Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Battery Caution Statement Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. https://www.peplink.com 283 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For Balance 20X Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the l imits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These l imits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful i nterference when the equipment i s operated i n a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and i f i t i s not i nstalled and used i n accordance with the i nstruction manual, i t may cause harmful i nterference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment i n a residential area i s l ikely to cause harmful i nterference, i n which case the user will be required to correct the i nterference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure l imits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be i nstalled and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (Balance 20X) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. This device contains l icence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas l icence-exempt RSS(s). Operation i s subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio ex- empts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
https://www.peplink.com 284 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den
(i) The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potent for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems
(ii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band 5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(i) Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est reserve uniquement pour utilisation a l'interieur afin de reduire les risques de brouillage prejudiciable aux systemes de satellites mobiles utilisant les memes canaux
(ii) Le gain maximal d'antenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisan bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer a la limitation P.I.R.E specifiee pour l'exploitation point a point et non point a point, selon le cas. En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi etre avises que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont designes utilisateurs principaux (c.-a-d., qu'ils ont la priorite) pour les bande 5725-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Cet equipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED definies pour un environnement non controle. Cet equipement doit etre installe et utilise a une distance minimum de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. Battery Caution Statement Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. https://www.peplink.com 285 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance One Core ) https://www.peplink.com 286 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 287 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance Two ) https://www.peplink.com 288 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 289 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance 20X Pro ) https://www.peplink.com 290 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 291 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 19.84 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.89 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 292 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance 30 LTE ) https://www.peplink.com 293 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) https://www.peplink.com 294 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 295 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance 210 ) https://www.peplink.com 296 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 297 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance 310 5G ) https://www.peplink.com 298 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) EM7565 module:
https://www.peplink.com 299 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink EM9191 module:
MV31-W module:
https://www.peplink.com 300 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 21cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 301 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers (Balance 310X 5G) https://www.peplink.com 302 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 303 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers (Balance 310 Fiber 5G) https://www.peplink.com 304 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 305 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 2472 MHz ) : 19.94 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.76 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 306 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance SDX ) https://www.peplink.com 307 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 308 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For Balance SDX Pro Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Industry Canada Statement (Balance SDX Pro) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical Specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. Battery Caution Statement (Balance SDX Pro) Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. https://www.peplink.com 309 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance SDX Pro ) https://www.peplink.com 310 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 311 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink contact as: https:// www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 312 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For Balance 380X, Balance 580X Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Industry Canada Statement (Balance 380X, Balance 580X) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Ce produit rpond aux spcifications techniques applicables l'innovation, Science et Dveloppement conomique Canada. https://www.peplink.com 313 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( Balance 380X / Balance 580X ) https://www.peplink.com 314 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 315 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink contact as: https:// www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 316 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For Balance 20X Pro Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (Balance 20X Pro) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio ex-empts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den
(i) The device for operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potent for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits as appropriate; (detachable antenna only) ; and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band 5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(iii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate.
(i) Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est rserv uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;
(ii) Le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas. En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5725-5850 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL.
(iii) Le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with ISED RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Cet appareil doit tre install et utilis avec une distance minimale de 20cm entre lmetteuret votre corps. Cet appareil et sa ou ses antennes ne doivent pas tre co-localiss ou fonctionner en conjonction avec tout autre antenne ou transmetteur. This radio transmitter IC: 20682-P1AX19 has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below, with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed are strictly prohibited for use with this device. WIFI Antenna type: Omni-directional WIFI Antenna gain: 2.4GHz / 2.44 dBi 5150 ~ 5250 MHz / 4.10 dBi 5725 ~ 5850 MHz / 4.73 dBi Cet metteur radio IC : 20682-P1AX11 a t approuv par Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antennes rpertoris ci-dessous, avec le gain maximal autoris indiqu. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste qui ont un gain suprieur au gain maximum indiqu pour tout type rpertori sont strictement interdits pour une utilisation avec cet appareil. Type d'antenne WIFI : omnidirectionnelle Gain de l'antenne Wi-Fi : 2.4 GHz / 2.44 dBi 5150 ~ 5250 MHz / 4.10 dBi 5725 ~ 5850 MHz / 4.73 dBi Battery Caution Statement Risk of explosion if the battery replaced by an incorrect type, place the battery into fire, a hot oven, extremely high temperature or low air pressure surrounding environment, the leakage of flammable liquid or gas, and mechanically crushing or cutting of the battery. USB WAN Modem Port Specification Balance Series 20X Pro 30 LTE 30 Pro ONE TWO 210 Output Rating 5V DC, 2A 5V DC, 2A 5V DC, 2A 5V DC, 2A 5V DC, 1.5A 5V DC, 1A 310X 380 380X 580 580X 710 1350 2500 Output Rating 5V DC, 0.5A 5V DC, 0.5A 5V DC, 1A 5V DC, 0.5A 5V DC, 1A 5V DC, 2.5A 5V DC, 2.5A 5V DC, 2.5A https://www.peplink.com 317 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
1 2 3 | Internal Photograph | Internal Photos | 2.08 MiB | October 27 2022 / April 27 2023 | delayed release |
1 2 3 | External Photograph | External Photos | 649.21 KiB | October 27 2022 / April 27 2023 | delayed release |
1 2 3 | BPL-021X-PRO-LTEA-Q-T-PRM | ID Label/Location Info | 345.69 KiB | October 27 2022 / October 28 2022 |
Balance 20X Pro pepiink Product Code / HVIN: BPL-021X-PRO-LTEA-Q-T-PRM Serial No.:192E-DA5F-E2AD LAN MAC:10-56-CA-84-0E-E0 p64 C UK AP Password:CA840EE0 cA Input : 10-30V DC, 25W max (Power Port) Gontune Pen Ib- eiptneod Output : 5V DC, 2A (USB Port) IC: 20682-P1AX19 Contains IC: 5131A-LN920 CAN ICES-003(A) / NMB-003(A) Made in Taiwan M8 HW1
1 2 3 | BPL-021X-PRO-LTEA-Q-T-PRM PEPWAVE | ID Label/Location Info | 229.84 KiB | October 27 2022 / October 28 2022 |
Balance 20X Pro PEPWAVE. Product Code / HVIN: BPL-021X-PRO-LTEA-Q-T-PRM Serial No.:192E-DASF-E2AD LAN MAC:10-56-CA-84-0E-E0 e C UK AP Password:CA840EE0 CA Default Access Username: admin https://192.168.1.1 Password: admin FCC ID: U8G-P1AX19 Contains FCC ID: RI7LN920 IC: 20682-P1AX19 Input : 10-30V DC, 25W max (Power Port) Output : 5V DC, 2A (USB Port) Contains IC: 5131A-LN920 CAN ICES-003(A) / NMB-003(A) Made in Taiwan M8 HW1
1 2 3 | Confidentiality Request - STC | Cover Letter(s) | 1.32 MiB | October 27 2022 / October 28 2022 |
PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED A8, 5/F, HK Spinners Industrial Building, Phase 6, 481 Castle Peak Road, Cheung Sha Wan, Hong Kong Tel: +852 2990 7600; Fax: +852 3007 0588 Date: October 03, 2022 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: U8G-P1AX19 To Whom It May Concern, Short Term Confidentiality Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, we hereby respectfully request temporary confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below for an initial period of 180 days. External photo & Internal photo Test setup photo User manual The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to the Applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. We understand that pursuant to Rule 0.457, disclosure of this Application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. _____________________ Antony Chong Director of Hardware Engineering antonyc@peplink.com
1 2 3 | Confidentiality Request for LTC | Cover Letter(s) | 1.20 MiB | October 27 2022 / October 28 2022 |
PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED A8, 5/F, HK Spinners Industrial Building, Phase 6, 481 Castle Peak Road, Cheung Sha Wan, Hong Kong Tel: +852 2990 7600; Fax: +852 3007 0588 Date: October 03, 2022 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: U8G-P1AX19 To Whom It May Concern, Long Term Confidentiality Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, we hereby respectfully request confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:
Block Diagrams Schematics Operational Description The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to the Applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. We understand that pursuant to Rule 0.457, disclosure of this Application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. _____________________ Antony Chong Director of Hardware Engineering antonyc@peplink.com
1 2 3 | Test Photograph for 15B | Test Setup Photos | 1.16 MiB | October 27 2022 / April 27 2023 | delayed release |
1 2 3 | WLAN Channel 12 13 | Cover Letter(s) | 248.49 KiB | October 27 2022 / October 28 2022 |
PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED Date: October 03, 2022 We, PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED, declare that the device does not support channel 12 ~ 13 in 2.4GHz band and any non-US/Canada channels in all the operational mode(s) for the following product. FCC ID: U8G-P1AX19 IC ID: 20682-P1AX19 If you should have any question(s) regarding this declaration, please dont hesitate to contact us. Thank you!
Sincerely yours, Name: Antony Chong Title: Director of Hardware Engineering Company: PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED Tel: +852-2990-7600 Fax: +852 3007 0588 E-mail: antonyc@peplink.com
1 2 3 | setup Photo for 15C E | Test Setup Photos | 361.94 KiB | October 27 2022 / April 27 2023 | delayed release |
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2022-10-28 | JAD - Part 15 Class A Digital Device | Original Equipment | |
2 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
3 | 5745 ~ 5825 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 | Effective |
2022-10-28
|
||||
1 2 3 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED
|
||||
1 2 3 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0016347064
|
||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
A8, 5/F, HK Spinners Industrial Building, Phase 6, 481 Castle Peak Road
|
||||
1 2 3 |
A8, 5/F, HK Spinners Industrial Building, Phase 6
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Cheung Sha Wan, N/A
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Hong Kong
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 | TCB Application Email Address |
v******@nemko.com
|
||||
1 2 3 | TCB Scope |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
||||
1 2 3 |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 | Grantee Code |
U8G
|
||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Product Code |
P1AX19
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Name |
A******** C****
|
||||
1 2 3 | Title |
Director of Hardware Engineering
|
||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
85229********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
85230********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
a******@peplink.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 04/27/2023 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Class | JAD - Part 15 Class A Digital Device | ||||
1 2 3 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
1 2 3 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |||||
1 2 3 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | peplink PEPWAVE Wireless Product | ||||
1 2 3 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 3 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Grant Comments | This device is approved with a certified transmitter (FCC ID: RI7LN920). | ||||
1 2 3 | Output power listed is conducted. This device has 20 MHz and 40MHz bandwidth modes. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. End Users must be provided with transmitter operation conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This device is approved with a certified transmitter (FCC ID: RI7LN920). | |||||
1 2 3 | Output power listed is conducted. This device has 20 MHz, 40MHz, and 80MHz bandwidth modes. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. End Users must be provided with transmitter operation conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This device is restricted for indoor use. This device is approved with a certified transmitter (FCC ID: RI7LN920). | |||||
1 2 3 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
DEKRA TESTING AND CERTIFICATION Hsin Chu Lab.
|
||||
1 2 3 | Name |
W******** L******
|
||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
886-3******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
886-3********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
w******@dekra.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15B | CC | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | CC MO | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3793000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15E | CC MO | 5180 | 5240 | 0.0755 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 15E | CC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.0778 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC